Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No.DMR-XW300
Region management information
DVD-Video
This unit plays DVD-Video marked with labels
containing the region number “4” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
3
4
ALL
4
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
This DVD Recorder is for viewing and
recording free to view channels only, not pay
TV or encrypted channels.
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
Declaration of Conformity No. 5368, 25th
January 2008
Notice for DVB functions
≥Any function related to DVB (Digital Video
Broadcasting) will work in areas where
DVB-T (MPEG2) digital terrestrial
broadcasting is received. Consult your local
Panasonic dealer with coverage areas.
≥This unit has the capability for DVB
specifications. But future DVB services
cannot be guaranteed.
≥This unit does not support MHP (Multimedia
Home Platform).
RQT9135-L
GN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Characteristics of this unit
Record with High Definition
2 programmes Simultaneous Recording
It is possible to record in high definition quality
It is possible to record 2 programmes being
broadcasted at the same time.
when the broadcast is high definition.
(HDD only)
➡ 31
➡ 7
VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”
7-Day EPG
Timer recording is made easier because the TV
Guide allows you to see programme information
up to 7 days ahead.
Operation of this unit can be controlled by the
remote control of the TV (VIERA) by connecting
with the HDMI cable to the TV (VIERA).
➡ 72
➡ 24
≥Pause live TV programme
≥Direct TV Recording
TV Guide
SUN 10/01/08 19:10
All Types
All DVB Services
SUN 10/01 Landscape
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
VIERA
News
News
News
Select Service
Info
OPTION
Page
OK
CH
Select Programme
Portrait/Landscape
GUIDE
Page
RETURN
-24 Hr
+24 Hr
Prog. type
Favourites
DIGA
Copy with High Definition Quality
It is possible to input high definition video
(AVCHD) from the video camera.
(HDD only)
➡ 56
RQT9135
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Getting started
Title
Getting started
Recording
Included accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Characteristics of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Advanced recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operation during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . 35
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
TV Guide data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Quick Start Guide
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Regarding DR (Direct Recording) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . .8
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
USB memories you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Cards you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . .15
Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inserting, removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inserting, removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Disc and card care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Playing back
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Operation during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Display the subtitle during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connecting a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
—Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Switching of the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playback the title that was viewed once [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
To edit the group of titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playback of the High Definition Camera
Video (AVCHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Playback of the Playlist created on
Basic operations
Watching digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Switching audio of the TV broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
To show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
To show Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Editing
Editing titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Create Chapter Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Editing and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing DVD-Video/Playing recorded
video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Playing DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Playing recorded video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Recording television programmes [HDD] . . . . . . . . . .23
When recording digital broadcast with subtitle or
multiple audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
To specify a time to stop recording
Copying
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
—One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Timer Recording (Using the TV Guide System) . . . .24
Programme to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programme to a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Deleting during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
With Other Equipment
Recording broadcasts from external equipment . . .53
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . .54
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Recording via AV3 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format) or the SD Video
(MPEG 2 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying SD Video (MPEG 2 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
About descriptions in these operating instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➡ ±±”.
RQT9135
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures
Others
Still pictures
Convenient functions
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Deleting still pictures and music using
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DELETE Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Deleting still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Deleting music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Editing still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Still pictures operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory
—Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copying new still pictures on the SD card
—Copy New Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Easy control only with VIERA remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Convenient functions to playback
and viewing or listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
FUNCTION MENU window/Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . 76
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
To pause the TV programme you are watching
Music
—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Music
Disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Providing a name for a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Enabling the unit’s recording function—Format . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Selecting the background style—Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
—Auto-Play Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment
—Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playing music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playing music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Useful functions during music play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Editing music/playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Album and track operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Register track to Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Editing Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Playlist operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
HDD/Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Copying music to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Copying music from a CD or a USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Reference
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . 91
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . 91
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR. . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Connecting a Digital television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Operations that can be performed
simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Operations that can be performed while recording or
copying a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Starting of the timer recording while executing
other operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
When removing a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
RQT9135
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
This unit can record or copy to the following HDD or discs.
Internal
DDVVDD--RRAAMM DDVVDD--RR
DDVVDD--RR DDLL DDVVDD--RRWW
++RRWW
HHDDDD
++RR
++RR DDLL
To record
It can only record to HDD by pressing [¥ REC].
Discs
HDD
REC
Can do
Cannot do
To timer record
It can only record to HDD or DVD-RAM when using timer record.
Other Discs
DVD-RAM
TV Guide
SUN 10/01/08 19:10
HDD
All Types
All DVB Services
SUN 10/01 Landscape
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
News
News
News
Select Service
OK
Info
OPTION
Page
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
Page
Can do
Can do
Cannot do
-24 Hr
+24 Hr Prog. type
Favourites
Record to the HDD and then copy to
the disc.
RQT9135
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Various recording modes can be selected when recording or copying is performed on this unit. Time and quality of recording varies depending on
the recording mode. (➡ 30, Recording modes)
The following are characteristics of DR (Direct Recording) mode.
Regarding DR (Direct Recording) mode
This unit can record the digital broadcasting as broadcasted if the record mode is set to DR mode when recording.
The following can be recorded in DR mode
HHDDDD
When recording a high definition programme
Quality of the recording depends on the recording mode.
Programmes in high definition (HD) quality
Record as high definition (HD) quality
DR
XP
SP
LP
EP
FR
Record as standard definition (SD) quality
When recording a programme with subtitle or multiple audio
Programmes with subtitle or multiple audio
All subtitles and multiple audio are
recorded.
DR
Goal!
Goal!
XP
SP
LP
EP
FR
Subtitles cannot be recorded. Only one
audio can be recorded for the multiple
audio.
≥See page 30 for description about the difference of the contents recorded depending on the recording mode.
When copying DR mode titles to disc
≥It is copied in standard definition (SD).
≥It is copied in Normal Speed mode.
Titles in DR mode
Titles in high definition (HD)
quality
Discs
≥Copy as standard definition (SD) quality
≥Copy in Normal Speed mode
Subtitles cannot be copied. Only one audio can be copied for the
multiple audio.
RQT9135
HHDDDD
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Hard disk drive (HDD)
Standard symbol
[HDD]
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Still picture
Music
Quality that can be
recorded
High definition (HD) quality
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode that can
be recorded
All recording mode
(DR, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR)
Rewritable
≤
≤
≤
Timer recording
Copy-once recording
RQT9135
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc type
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DVD-RW
Standard symbol
[RAM]
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Still picture
Video
Quality that can be
recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
Recording mode that can
be recorded
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
–
Rewritable
≤
≤
≤
Timer recording
–
–
Copy-once recording
(CPRM)
≤
CPRM compatible discs
only.
Play on other players
[RAM] can be played back
on Panasonic DVD
≥Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
≥[-R]DL] can be played back only on equipment compatible with this disc.
recorders and DVD-RAM
compatible DVD players.
Note
≥Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be able to be recorded to.
Disc type
+R
+R DL
+RW
Standard symbol
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[+RW]
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Quality that can be
recorded
Standard definition (SD) quality
XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
Recording mode that can
be recorded
Rewritable
–
≤
Timer recording
–
–
Copy-once recording
(CPRM)
Play on other players
≥Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment.
≥[+R]DL] can be played back only on equipment compatible with this disc.
[+RW] can be played back only on
equipment compatible with this disc.
≥If the disc failed to play on other
equipment, we recommend you
create top menu (➡ 79).
Note
≥+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be
incompatible. However, discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
≥8X Speed +RW disc is not supported.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
∫ Regarding 8 cm Disc
This unit cannot record or edit the 8cm DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R DL or +RW.
Only playback or copy to the HDD is possible.
RQT9135
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
Play-only discs
Disc type
Logo
Standard
symbol
Uses
DVD-Video
[DVD-V]
Movie and music discs
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
≥You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 78) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)
CD
[CD]
–
–
MP3, JPEG
≥CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG
Disc with high
definition
video (AVCHD)
recorded by
other devices
[AVCHD]
Following disc can be played.
≥DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW
≥Only the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW(V), +R or +R DL which was
finalised (➡ 110) with the same equipment that was used to record
can be played.
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Discs that cannot be played
≥Blu-ray Disc (BD-Video, BD-RE, BD-R)
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalised (➡ 110).
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”
≥DVD-Audio
≥HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD, SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, Video CD, DivX discs, etc.
RQT9135
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB memory and card information
USB memories you can use on this unit
Compatible USB memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class:
–USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.
≥
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
≥PTP protocol is not supported.
Format
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Indicated in these
instructions by
[USB]
Data that can be played
MP3
Still pictures (JPEG)
Data that can be copied
MP3
≥It can be copied to HDD.
Still pictures (JPEG)
≥It can be copied to HDD.
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD is connected to this unit’s USB port:
–you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
–you can copy the HD Video shot with the camera to this unit’s HDD.
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
[Note]
≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Cards you can use on this unit
SD Memory Card§ (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 32 GB)
Type
§
Including miniSD Card and microSD Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
Indicated in these
instructions by
[SD]
Data that can be played
Still pictures (JPEG)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
Data that can be copied
Still pictures (JPEG)
≥It can be copied to HDD or DVD-RAM.
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (➡ 57)
≥HD Video shot with a Panasonic digital camcorder, etc. can be copied to the HDD. (➡ 56)
Instructions
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§
A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
Suitable SD cards
≥When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 78, 110).
≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in
FAT32 format.
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory
Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
∫ Setting the protection
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
RQT9135
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1Turn the unit on (➡ 18)
2Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (➡ 22, 23, 58)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (➡ 26, 36, 70)
DVD
TV
5Basic operations for recording and play
6Show digital channel information (➡ 21)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (➡ 37)/Show status messages (➡ 75)
7Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (➡ 38)
8Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 22, 58)
9Show OPTION menu (➡ 42, 60)
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
:Colour buttons
Use in accordance with instruction on the screen.
;Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (➡ 23)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (➡ 23)
<Select audio (➡ 20, 39)
= Show on-screen menu (➡ 74)
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
TEXT
STTL
8 9
7
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
>Transmit the remote control signal
?Television operations (➡ 89)
@Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(➡ 23, 37)
AShow teletext (➡ 21)
BInput select (TV, AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 20, 23, 53, 54)
CShow subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
programme has subtitles.) (➡ 20)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
I
OK
DExit the menu screen
EShow the TV Guide screen (➡ 20, 24)
FShow FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 76)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
GReturn to previous screen
HCreate chapter (➡ 44)
IShow Timer Recording screen (➡ 34)
JSkip the specified time (➡ 39)
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
AUDIO
DISPLAY
F Rec MANUAL SKIP
KSkip approx. 1 minute forward (➡ 39)
LStart Flexible Recording (➡ 32)
Buttons used for DVD-Video
“Top Menu”>[DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
“Menu”>[OPTION]
∫ The remote control information
Batteries
Use
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
Remote control signal sensor
20
20
30
7 m directly in front of the unit
30
R6/LR6, AA
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
RQT9135 damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front
panel.
1Standby/on switch (Í/I) (➡ 18)
9SD card slot (➡ 15)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2Disc tray (➡ 15)
:USB port (➡ 15)
;Channel select (➡ 23)
<Start recording (➡ 23)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 23)
=Stop (➡ 23, 38)
3Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 54)
4Display (➡ below)
5Recording indicator
6Remote control signal sensor
7Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (➡ 53, 54)
8Open/close disc tray (➡ 15)
>Start play
Rear panel terminals (➡ 16, 17, 91–94)
The unit’s display
SD USB
SDVD
PLAY
1Copying indicator
2SD card slot indicator
3USB port indicator
4Disc indicator
5Timer recording indicator
6Drive (HDD, DVD or SD) indicator
7Main display section indicator
8Playback indicator
≥Indicators for functions that this unit does not support will not light.
RQT9135
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling
fan and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
≥Do not place on anything that
∫ While operating
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
DO NOT
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The
HDD may become damaged.)
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
This unit
VCR
≥Place in an area where condensation
does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the
display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating
for a short time.)
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving
from a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa,
or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD
heads, etc.
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
DO NOT
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the Lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
RQT9135
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)
Inserting discs
Disc and card care
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
∫ How to hold a disc or card
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up with the
arrow facing in.
DO
DO NOT
Insert label-up.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
Insert fully.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
DO
DO NOT
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [CD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
[Note]
≥When using 8 cm disc, remove the disc from the cartridge.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
Inserting, removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
When the USB memory is flashing, the USB memory is being read
from. Do not turn off the unit or remove the USB memory. Such
action may result in malfunction or loss of the USB memory’s
contents.
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
DO NOT
shapes.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related
operations (➡ 56, 58).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any
subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
Inserting, removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the
card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit.
Inserting the card
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.
Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.
If you are using a
miniSD card or a
microSD card, insert
it into the adaptor
that comes with the
card.
e.g., miniSD
ADAPTER
Insert and remove
this adaptor from the
unit.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
Removing the card
1 Press on the centre of the card.
2 Pull it straight out.
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card”
screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the
SD drive (➡ 56, 58).
≥If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
RQT9135
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (➡ 91) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 3 W (Power Save mode)]
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.
Connecting a television
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Red White Yellow
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
2
2
AC mains lead
Other connections
(➡ 17, 91)
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
3
4
1
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Cooling fan
P
Y
P
NT
T
RF
IN
Red White Yello
w
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
AV1
(
)
TV
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
RF
OUT
AC IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
Aerial cable
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB
output on this unit.
[Required]setting]
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 85)
RQT9135
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV on page 16 as follows.
.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [➡ 72, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear
panel
HDMI IN
[Required]setting]
≥Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio Output”
to “On” (➡ 85).
(The default setting is “On”.)
HDMI cable
PR
Y
PB
COMPOONENT
VIDEO OUT
RF
IN
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
HDMI AV OUT
AV1
(
)
TV
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
RF
OUT
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 110) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9135
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
DVD
TV
connections to this unit.
2
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
PAGE
CH
When the Download from TV screen appears (➡ 19)
2 3
1
4 5 6
3 Press [3, 4] to select your region
TEXT
STTL
8 9
7
and press [OK].
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Region Selection
NSW / ACT
Victoria
Queensland
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
South Australia
Western Australia
Northern Territory
STATUS
Tasmania
I
OK
OK
OPTION
RETURN
3, 4, 5
After Region Selection setting is complete, Auto Tuning setting
screen appears.
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
≥Auto-Tuning starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels. TV
channels will be located and stored ready for use.
This takes 3 minutes.
AUDIO
DISPLAY
F
Rec MANUAL SKIP
Auto Tuning-Digital (DVB)
Please wait!
Prog. RF Ch
6
Service Name
ABC
69
Net ID TS ID Quality
352
354
82041
12302 82041
9
9
1
2
12302
ABC 2
This will take about 3 mins.
RETURN
Auto-Tuning is complete when Quick Start setting screen
appears.
The time information for your region can be obtained.
RQT9135
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Download from the TV
4 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off”
If this unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) supporting
HDAVI Control 3 via an HDMI cable, then the setting information
on the TV is acquired by this unit when the unit is turned on for
the first time. Please proceed to the following steps.
and press [OK].
Quick Start
Download fromTV
On
Off
When “On” is selected, power consumption
during standby will increase, and “Power Save”
option will be set to “Off”.
Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN : to cancel
OK
RETURN
RETURN
≥On:
After Download from TV is complete, Quick Start setting
screen appears.
It is possible to start quickly from the power off state.
≥Off:
Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
It will go into the Power Save mode when the power is
turned off.
Quick Start
On
Off
After Quick Start setting is complete, TV aspect setting screen
appears.
When “On” is selected, power consumption
during standby will increase, and “Power Save”
option will be set to “Off”.
5 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
OK
and press [OK].
RETURN
TV Aspect
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
4:3 TV
Pan & Scan
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
Letterbox
[Note]
OK
≥Acquisition of the setting information is not supported by all
Panasonic TVs (VIERA).
RETURN
≥16:9:
≥The acquisition may take some time depending on the VIERA
setting information.
≥If Region Selection screen is displayed, please go to step 3 on
page 18.
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(➡ 110).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(➡ 110).
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (➡ 81)
∫ To restart set up (➡ 80)
RQT9135
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Watching digital broadcasts
∫ Select the programme to view using the TV
Guide
1 Press [GUIDE].
DVD
TV
DVD
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
TV Guide
SUN 10/01/08 19:10
CH
All Types
All DVB Services
SUN 10/01 Landscape
PAGE
CH
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
News
News
TEXT
STTL
8 9
News
7
TEXT
STTL
DELETE
Select Service
OK
INPUT
Info
OPTION
Page
0
SELECT
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
Page
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
-24 Hr
+24 Hr Prog. type
Favourites
Operations in the TV Guide system (➡ 37)
INPUT SELECT
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme to
STATUS
EXIT
GUIDE
STATUS
I
view and press [OK].
News
OK
View
,,,
OK
OPTION
RETURN
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
CREATE
CHAPTER
Colour
buttons
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
≥This is displayed only when the programme currently
broadcasting is selected.
AUDIO
DISPLAY
F
Rec MANUAL SKIP
AUDIO
3 Press [3, 4] to select “View”and press [OK].
This unit has the tuner which allows it to directly receive and record
digital terrestrial channels.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Important:
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
Switching audio of the TV broadcast
Press [AUDIO].
Select the channel
1 Turn on the television and select the
≥Audio will switch according to the contents of the programme every
time it is pressed.
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
HDD
41:03 DR
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
002 ABC TV
STEREO LR
Dolby Digital
3 Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
(eng)
and select “TV”.
Input Selection
To show subtitle
When “STTL” appears in digital channel information (➡ 21)
AV1
AV2
AV3
AV4
DV
Press [STTL ].
≥Press again to hide the subtitle.
TV
Select
Change
RETURN
≥It will switch when the display is turned off.
(It will switch faster by pressing [OK])
4 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically.
The length of time the digital channel information is displayed
can be changed. (➡ 84, On-Screen Messages)
≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[Note]
RQT9135
≥This unit can receive free cable television but it cannot receive paid
services.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show Teletext
You can enjoy teletext broadcasting, including news, weather
forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the
broadcasters.
Digital channel information
While stopped
Press [STATUS ].
When “TEXT” appears in digital channel information (➡ right)
1 Press [TEXT ].
All DVB Services
Select FAV List
Software update
10:30
1 TEN HD
Corontation street
9:00 - 11:00
Sub page number
Now
Bad Signal
Rating:PG
STTL TEXT
<<01 02 03 04 05 06 07
>>
Current
page
number
P100
TELETEXT
INFORMATION
1 Channel and Station Name
2 Programme name and Broadcast time
3 Current favourite list
4 Change the favourite list
5 Software update (➡ 90)
6 The parental ratings level is displayed
7 TV signal is weak (➡ below)
8 Subtitle (➡ 20)
Colour bar
9 Teletext (➡ left)
2 Press [3, 4], the numbered buttons,
: Multiple audio
or the colour buttons to select the
page.
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
Follow the instruction on the screen to select the page.
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ] again.
To show the sub page
(Only when there are sub pages)
Press [2, 1].
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
∫ Change the Teletext mode
“Teletext” of the Setup menu can be changed to following modes.
If “Bad Signal” is displayed:
≥Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
(➡ 84)
≥TOP mode (Only when there is TOP text)
TOP is a particular improvement of the standard teletext service
that results in an easier search and effective guide.
–Fast overview of the teletext information available
–Easy to use step-by-step selection of the topical subject
–Page status information at the bottom of the screen
≥List mode
[Note]
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is
displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
Four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the
bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered
and stored in this unit.
To store frequently viewed page (List mode only)
During the page is displayed
1 Press the colour button of the colour to store.
2 Press and hold [OK].
∫ If New service message appears
(➡ 81, New Service Message)
P100
Broadcast
101
200
400
888
The number changes to white.
To change stored pages (List mode only)
1 Press the colour button of the colour to change.
2 Enter the new page number with the numbered buttons.
3 Press and hold [OK].
To exit the teletext screen
Press [TEXT
]
[Note]
≥The teletext function depends on respective stations.
RQT9135
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DVD-Video/Playing recorded video contents
Refer to “Advanced playback” (➡ 38) for detail
information.
Playing recorded video contents
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You can
also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.
DVD
TV
Following screen is displayed when recordable disc is inserted.
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
e.g.,
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
DVD-RAM
2 3
1
Play
Numbered
buttons
Copy Navigator
Exit
4 5 6
TEXT
STTL
8 9
7
DELETE
INPUT
DVD-RAM is inserted.
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
OK
,
RETURN
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
Press [3, 4] to select “Play” and press [OK].
It will go to step 3 (➡ below).
STATUS
I
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
OK
,,,
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
OK
OPTION
RETURN
OPTION
“Red”
CREATE
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
CHAPTER
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
button to select “VIDEO”.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Preparation
Date
25.05
01.01 AV2
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Titles
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
0:00(DR)
≥Turn on this unit.
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Playing DVD-Video
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
press [OK].
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
2
When a menu screen appears on the television
Regarding DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 40)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
5
1
4
2
3
≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered
buttons.
≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the
menu screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
To return to the menu screen
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” and press [OK].
≥You can also press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to return to the menu
screen.
RQT9135
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording television programmes [HDD]
Refer to “Important notes for recording” (
➡
28) and
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
“Advanced recording” (
➡
30) for detail information.
“REC1” or “REC2” will light
DVD
TV
REC1
VOL
CH
HD]
DRIVE
[
SELECT
AV
1
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data
will not be overwritten.
≥Recording mode cannot be changed while recording a
programme.
≥When [¥ REC] is pressed while a drive other than the HDD
is selected, it will automatically switch to HDD and start the
recording.
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
3
buttons
TEXT
STTL
8 9
7
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
2
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
6
To stop recording
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
Press [∫].
6
STATUS
I
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
OK
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
5
4
AUDIO
DISPLAY
F
Rec MANUAL SKIP
This operation will only record to HDD.
To record to a disc (➡ 25)
Preparation
When recording digital broadcast with
subtitle or multiple audio
If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, there are
following differences depending on the recording modes.
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD drive.
≥When recording in DR mode
All subtitles and multiple audio are recorded. It is possible to switch
them after recording.
The HDD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2 Press [INPUT SELECT] a few times
and select “TV”.
≥When recording in XP, SP, LP, or EP modes
Subtitles cannot be recorded. Multiple audio will be recorded with
the contents selected when the recording starts, and the switching
cannot be done after the recording.
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Select the audio to be recorded with “Audio Mode for Digital
Broadcast” in the Setup menu prior to the recording. (➡ 83)
To select with the numbered buttons:
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the
During recording
recording mode.
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
≥It will switch every time it is pressed.
time.
e.g.,
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
Recording Mode
It can be recorded
with the same quality
of the broadcast.
Remain in DR mode 23:26
Remain in XP mode 58:01
Remain in SP mode 115:01
Remain in LP mode 230:27
Remain in EP mode 458:26
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 24, 34) or while
using Flexible Recording (➡ 32).
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
≥It will switch when the display is turned off.
(It will switch faster by pressing [OK])
≥Recording modes (➡ 30)
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
≥To record 2 programmes simultaneously (➡ 31)
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT9135
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Recording (Using the TV Guide System)
Refer to “Advanced timer recording” (➡ 34–37) for
detail information.
Programme to HDD
1 Press [GUIDE].
DVD
TV
DVD
TV Guide
SUN 10/01/08 19:10
VOL
CH
All Types
All DVB Services
DRIVE
SUN 10/01 Landscape
SELECT
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
AV
Time:
ABC 1
PAGE
CH
ABC 2
News
News
2 3
1
4 5 6
News
TEXT
STTL
Select Service
OK
Info
OPTION
Page
8 9
7
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
Page
-24 Hr
+24 Hr Prog. type
Favourites
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
≥Following screen is displayed when the programme currently
broadcasting is selected.
STATUS
EXIT
I
GUIDE
News
,,,
OK
View
OK
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
OPTION
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Rec Set” and press [OK].
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 28).
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:24 SP DVD
1:58 SP
SUN 01/01/08 13:12
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
[Prog.Name] News
Date
SUN 1/1
OFF
All DVB Services
22 ABC TV
01:10
Weekly
Favourites
Service Name
Start
[HDD] [RAM]
Stop
01:50
Drive
Mode
HDD
XP
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Renew
Programme Name
OFF
OK
RETURN
Preparation
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 34, step 3).
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 86).
3 Press [OK].
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
oday’s show we will...
[Note]
Timer icon
≥TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 84), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9135
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide
Programme to a disc
[RAM]
screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK].
≥Only 1 programme can be set to timer record on the disc.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV
Guide disappears.)
1 Insert a disc.
∫ To modify the timer recording on the TV Guide
∫When the screen with “Format Disc” is
screen
displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OPTION].
You need to format the unrecorded disc such as new discs.
e.g.,
Menu
DVD-RAM
View
Copy Navigator
Format Disc
Exit
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
This disc is not formatted and cannot be played.
To format the disc, please select “Format Disc”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Rec Edit” and press [OK].
OK
(➡ 34, step 3)
RETURN
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format Disc” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 35)
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 35)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 36)
∫When the screen without “Format Disc” is
displayed
The disc is already formatted.
Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [OK].
2 Press [GUIDE].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
≥Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Rec Set” and press [OK] if the
programme currently broadcasting is selected.
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:24 SP DVD
1:58 SP SUN 01/01/08 13:12
[Prog.Name] News
Date
SUN 1/1
OFF
Weekly
Favourites
Service Name
Start
All DVB Services
22 ABC TV
01:10
Stop
01:50
Drive
HDD
Mode
XP
Renew
OFF
OK
Programme Name
RETURN
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 34, step 3).
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive” and
press [2, 1] to select “DVD”.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Mode” and
change the recording mode with
[2, 1].
≥DR mode cannot be selected.
6 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
oday’s show we will...
Timer icon
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9135
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting titles
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
DVD
TV
1
While stopped
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
2 3
1
4 5 6
press [OK].
TEXT
STTL
8 9
0
7
DELETE Navigator
Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
DELETE
INPUT
DELETE
Date
25.05
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Titles
SELECT
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
01.01 AV2
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
,
Rec time
0:00(DR)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
Not viewed
STATUS
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
RETURN
OPTION
VIDEO
EXIT
I
MUSIC
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
FUNCTION
MENU
OK
,,,
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
OPTION
RETURN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
press [;].
CHAPTER
“Red”
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
Switching of the Navigator (➡ 40)
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the
option menu. (➡ 42, step 4)
≥Title that is currently recording cannot be deleted.
≥Titles on the disc cannot be deleted in the following cases:
–While recording to disc
–While high speed copying
4 Press [OK].
Preparation
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 77, Setting the protection).
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
∫ Available disc space after deleting
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
≥[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles
Deleting during play
Available
disc space
......
1
While playing
Last title
recorded
Title
Title
Press [DELETE ¢].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
The title is deleted.
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting
Available disc space
increases after deleting
Last title
recorded
Available
......
Title
Title
Title
disc space
Later recorded
titles
Deleted
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
......
This space become available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.
≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
RQT9135
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
functions (➡ 51)
DVD
TV
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
VOL
CH
DRIVE
Navigator/Copying list (➡ 51)
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
For titles in DR mode
Normal speed (FR mode)
2 3
4 5 6
1
TEXT
STTL
For titles in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
≥[RAM]
–High speed (recording mode as is)
[When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space,
copy will perform at normal speed.]
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Titles recorded with the “Rec for High Speed Copy” settings
“On”: High speed (recording mode as is)
“Off”: Normal speed (FR mode)
8 9
7
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
,
3
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
STATUS
I
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
OK
2, 3, 4, 5
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” do not match.
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
[Note]
≥Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalised (➡ 79). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
simultaneously.
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 50).
≥Titles recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or NTSC)
from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be
copied.
1 Insert a disc.
e.g.,
DVD-RAM
Play
Copy Navigator
Exit
DVD-RAM is inserted.
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy
Navigator” and press [OK].
DVD-RAM CPRM
COPY Navigator
HDD DVD
Disc Space: 4310 MB
Size: MB( 0%)
0
Total
:
0
Date
25.05
01.01 AV2
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Title
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Time
12:36
Rec time 0:52(SP)
Page 01/01
Select
OK
RETURN
OPTION
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Switching of the Navigator (➡ 40)
4 Press [OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
It will automatically format the unformatted disc, such as new
disc, when copying.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To stop copying
RQT9135
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notes for recording
You cannot record by pressing [¥ REC].
≥[RAM] Timer recording is possible.
Regarding Recording
to the disc
Broadcast in multi-channel sound (Digital broadcast only):
You can select the audio language when receiving audio in multi channel broadcast [“I/II” appears at the bottom of
digital channel information display (➡ 21)].
Selecting Audio for
Recording
≥When recording in DR mode [HDD]
All multiple audio are recorded.
It is possible to switch the audio after recording.
≥When recording in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
It will be recorded with the audio selected when the recording starts, and the switching cannot be done after the
recording. Perform following operation before recording.
Hello
Hola
Hallo
Select the audio that you want
to record in “Audio Mode for
Digital Broadcast” in the Setup
menu (➡ 83).
Bilingual broadcasts (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 only):
If you record from external equipment
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
Programmes with subtitles (Digital broadcast only):
It is possible to display the subtitles when you are receiving a programme with the subtitles.
[“STTL” appears at the bottom of digital channel information display (➡ 21)]
Recording of the
subtitles
≥When recording in DR mode [HDD]
Subtitles will be recorded as is.
It is possible to switch the subtitles after it is recorded.
≥When recording in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
Subtitles cannot be recorded.
≥When the “Rec for High Speed Copy” of the Setup menu is “On”
–Record in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
–Copy from the finalised disc (DVD-Video) to the HDD
≥When recording to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
Recording of 16:9
image such as wide
broadcasting
It will be recorded in accordance to the setting of “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 82) in the Setup menu.
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”, recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Recording of the
high definition
quality or surround
audio
Contents that can be recorded depends on the recording mode. (➡ 30)
≥It is recorded in quality as broadcasted when the recording mode is DR.
RQT9135
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[RAM]
When you want to
copy titles in high
speed mode from the
HDD to discs.
≥Titles in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR mode can be copied at high speed.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Titles in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR mode can be copied at high speed using following method.
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “On”. ➡ 82)
Record to the HDD
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
HDD
In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 110) compatible DVD-RAM.
When recording the
“One time only
recording”
[HDD]
broadcasts
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to a disc (They are deleted from the HDD).
They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalised (➡ 79).
Playing the disc on
other players
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them
as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
/I
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
/
/
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
O
P
E
N
/
C
L
O
S
E
SEARCH
ENTER
L
N
V
O
Y
PLA
DIS
U
MEN
OP
T
RETUR
NU
O
N
ME
OFF
DC
IN
9V
Finalise
OPEN
ND
OU
RR
A
T
A.SU
E
E
REP
D
MO
ITOR
PIC
MON
E
MO
DE
TUR
[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (➡ 79).
RQT9135
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Recording modes
This also explains about while recording and while copying. (There are discs that can only copy, depending on the disc)
DR
XP, SP, LP, EP
FR
Recording mode
Disc that can be
recorded
[HDD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Features
Direct Recording mode
Record with the same quality of the
broadcast
Record in quality as in conventional
analogue broadcast
Flexible Recording Mode
Record by automatically adjusting
the quality between XP, SP, LP, and
EP depending on the remaining area
on the disc
Broadcasting/input
that can be recorded
Digital broadcasting
Digital broadcasting
External input
DV input
Quality that can be
recorded
Quality same as broadcasted
(HD quality and SD quality)
SD quality only
Stereo audio
The audio of the
surround
programme
Surround audio as the broadcast
Multiple audio
Record all multiple audio
Record only one audio
≥Before recording
–Select the audio with “Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast” in the Setup
menu (➡ 83).
≥Before copying
–“Copy”, “Advanced Copy”:Select the audio with “Audio Mode for Digital
Broadcast” in the Setup menu (➡ 83).
–“Copy Title Playing”:Select the audio with “Multi Audio” in the Disc menu
(➡ 74).
Subtitles
Can be recorded
Cannot be recorded
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
Recording Mode
HDD
(250 GB)
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
DVD-R DL
(8.5 GB)
+R DL
(8.5 GB)
Double-sided§2
(9.4 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
+RW
(4.7 GB)
DR§1 (HD:15 Mbps)
36 hours
66 hours
55 hours
DR§1 (SD:8 Mbps)
XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45 min.
1 hour 45 min.
SP (Standard
110 hours
221 hours
2 hours
4 hours
4 hours
8 hours
16 hours
2 hours
4 hours
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
recording mode)
LP (Long recording
mode)
EP (Extra long
441 hours
8 hours
8 hours
14 hours 20 min. 14 hours 20 min.
(10 hours (10 hours
45 min.§4 45 min.§4
recording mode)§3
(331 hours§4
)
(6 hours§4
)
(12 hours§4
)
(6 hours§4
)
)
)
§1 Recording time of DR mode depends on bit rate of broadcasting.
§2 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§3 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
§4 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “6 hours” in the Setup menu (➡ 82).
The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when using “8 hours”.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “8 hours” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “6 hours” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
RQT9135
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Regarding recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording.
≥Remaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of 15 Mbps. But the bit rate differs depending on the broadcast, so the displayed
remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time.
∫ Maximum number of titles that can be recorded
[HDD]
≥You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
∫ FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
2 programmes simultaneous recording
It is possible to record 2 programmes simultaneously.
Possible combination for 2 programmes simultaneous recording
To record both programmes
to the HDD
and
HDD
HDD
Digital broadcast
(DR mode)
Digital broadcast
or
external input
To record 1 programme
each onto the HDD and the
disc
DVD-RAM
(When timer recording)
and
HDD
Digital broadcast
(DR mode)
Digital broadcast
or
external input
To perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording, 1 programme out of the 2 needs to be recorded to the
HDD in “DR” mode.
[Note]
≥2 programmes simultaneous recording is not possible in following conditions:
– 2 programmes from the external input
– While recording from DV input, or executing “Recording via AV3 input”
– While high speed copying
– 2 programmes on same channel cannot be recorded simultaneously by pressing [¥ REC].
RQT9135
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
Flexible Recording
Playing while you are recording
Chasing playback
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
Playback from the beginning of the title of the programme recording
to the HDD, while recording to the HDD.
[HDD]
Recorded title is recorded exactly to the size of the new
disc (4.7 GB) by automatically selecting optimal quality from “XP”,
“SP”, “LP”, or “EP”.
Simultaneous rec and play
Playback the previously recorded title while recording onto the HDD
or timer recording onto the disc.
However, disc cannot be played back while timer recording onto the
disc.
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
1
While stopped
Press [F Rec].
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
Flexible Rec Record in FR mode.
recording.
Max rec time 8 Hour 00 Min.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
8
00
Min.
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
Set rec time
Hour
Start Cancel
Date
25.05
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Titles
OK
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
01.01 AV2
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
RETURN
Rec time
0:00(DR)
Not viewed
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording time in
EP (8 hours) mode.
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
RETURN
OPTION
VIDEO
MUSIC
Play
“[” is displayed on the recording programme.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
3 Press [3, 4] to select a title and
recording time.
press [OK].
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
To stop play
Press [∫].
3
When you want to start recording
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
[Note]
≥Recording starts.
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
HDD
REC1 0:59
Remaining time
of recording
ꢀ
022 ABC TV
RQT9135
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation during Recording
Check the recording
programme
Press [STATUS ].
e.g., while 2 programmes simultaneous recording
Recording programme
HDD
REC1
displayed on the TV screen
ꢀ
090 NINE HD
Recording programme not
displayed on the TV screen
002 ABC TV REC2
It is necessary to display the recording programme onto the TV screen to perform operations such as
pause.
Display the recording
programme on the TV
screen
≥If the input was switched:
Press [INPUT SELECT].
≥If the channel was switched: Press [W X CH].
≥If the drive was switched:
Press [DRIVE SELECT].
It is necessary to display the programme you want to stop on the TV screen while 2 programmes
simultaneous recording. (➡ above)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
It is necessary to display the programme you want to pause on the TV screen. (➡ above)
To pause recording
Press [;].
≥Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
≥When the recording in DR mode is paused, that part will show up as still picture instantaneously while
playback.
Press [INPUT SELECT].
Switch the input
Press [W X CH].
Switch to other channel
Record other programme with steps 1–5 on page 23.
Perform 2 programmes
simultaneousrecording
≥One of the 2 programmes needs to be digital broadcasting recorded with DR mode.
“REC1” and “REC2” will light
REC1
REC2
≥Channel switch / input switch while performing 2 programme simultaneous recording will switch between
the 2 recording programmes.
RQT9135
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
4 Press [OK].
Manually programming timer
recordings
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
[HDD] [RAM]
ode
P
S
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer icon
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:24 SP DVD
SUN 01/01/08 13:12
1:58 SP
Drive/Mode
New Timer Programme
Date
Service Name
Space
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Space
OK
RETURN
Total 0/32
Timer Off
DELETE
History List
Page
Page
CH
Check for available space
on HDD, etc., when the “!”
is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
OK
Programme” and press [OK].
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the items and
change the items with [2, 1].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:24 SP DVD
1:58 SP
SUN 01/01/08 13:12
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
[Prog.Name]
Date
SUN 1/1
OFF
Weekly
Favourites
Service Name
Start
All DVB Services
22 ABC TV
01:10
--
Stop
Drive
Mode
HDD
XP
Renew
OFF
OK
Programme Name
RETURN
≥Date
Current date up to one month later minus one day
≥Weekly
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the Direct Navigator
screen (➡ 40) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
≥Favourites
Select the favourites list
Select “AV input” when recording from the external input.
≥Service Name
Select the channel to record.
“AV1”, “AV2”, “AV3”, or “AV4” can be selected when “AV
input” is selected in “Favourites”.
≥Start/Stop
Press and hold [2, 1] to alter the Start (Start time) and
Stop (Finish time) in 15-minute increments.
≥Drive
Only 1 programme can be set to timer record on the disc.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 35, Relief Recording).
≥Mode
Recording modes (➡ 30)
≥Renew (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 35)
≥Programme Name
Press [OK]. (➡ 71, Entering text)
RQT9135
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the unit from recording
standby
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
Press [INPUT SELECT] or [W X CH] to display the programme that
you want to stop recording on the TV screen while 2 programmes
are simultaneously recording.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
1 Press [∫].
e.g.,
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
Stop Recording
and press the “Red” button.
≥The timer icon “F” (➡ 36) will change to grey.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (red) remains in the timer recording
list.
Recording [ ABC TV 022 ]
Timer recording of this programme in progress.
Stop this Timer recording ?
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby. (The timer icon “F” will change to red.)
Yes
No
OK
RETURN
Relief Recording
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, etc., the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
press [OK].
≥If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly, daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 40).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
Auto Renewal Recording
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Renew”
column.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “ON” and press
[OK].
[Note]
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
RQT9135
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
Notes on timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme
≥Only 1 programme can be set to timer record on the disc.
≥Timer recording will not be performed if the clock is not set.
≥If the “TV system” (➡ 84) in the Setup menu was modified to
playback a disc or a title while on timer recording standby, return
the setting to original before the recording is started.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:24 SP DVD
1:58 SP MON 12/01/08 1:30
Date
Service Name Drive/Mode
Space
MON 12/1 1:59 - 2:55
2 ABC TV
22 ABC TV
2 ABC TV
HDD/XP
HDD/XP
HDD/XP
OK
MON 12/1 2:06 - 2:08
OK
OK
SUN 12/7 2:16 - 2:17
New Timer Programme
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, last 1 minute of earlier programme
will not be recorded unless it can perform 2 programmes
simultaneous recording.
OK
RETURN
Total 0/32
Timer Off
DELETE
History List
Page
Page
CH
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
Icons
Recorded
Recorded
F
Red :Timer recording standby is activated.
Grey:Timer recording standby is not activated.
First 1 minute of the following programme is not recorded either if
the following programme set to be recorded is also DVD.
≥If the start of 2 timer recordings overlap with each other when 2
programme simultaneous recording is not possible, the programme
with the earlier start time will be recorded.
[
This programme is currently recording.
Part or all of the programme will not be recorded since
the programme is overlapping.
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
➡ 95
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ 35).
Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the
HDD.
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
! :
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left.
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (➡ 34,
step 3)
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].
∫ Confirm the History List
1
2
Press the “Green” button.
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK].
≥Reason why the timer recording failed or similar can be
confirmed.
≥Press the “Green” button to return to the previous screen.
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
[Note]
≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9135
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ When the TV Guide displays the empty TV Guide
Operations in the TV Guide system
list
TV Guide
Basic operations
SAT 13/01/08 19:45
ABC 1
All Types
All DVB Services
SAT 13/01 Landscape
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait
view.
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
The “empty” field
News
Landscape view
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually (➡ 34).
TV Guide
SAT 13/01/08 19:45
All Types
All DVB Services
SAT 13/01 Landscape
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or favourites
News
News
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme
type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or favourites.
News
Select Service
OK
Info
OPTION
Page
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE Portrait/Landscape
Page
-24 Hr
+24 Hr Prog. type
Favourites
1
From the desired programme type
Press the “Yellow” button to display
the list of programme type.
From the desired favourites
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of favourites.
Portrait view
TV Guide
SAT 13/01
SAT 13/01/08 19:45
Portrait
All Types
All DVB Services
ABC 1
ABC 2
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
item.
Prog.type
All Types
Favourites
All DVB Services
Select Programme
OK
Info
OPTION
Page
All DVB Services
Fav List1
Fav List2
All Types
Movies
News
CH
Select Service
RETURN
GUIDE
+24 Hr
Portrait/Landscape
Page
-24 Hr
Prog. type
Favourites
Entertainment
Sport
Children’s
Fav List3
Fav List4
To change channels Landscape view
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.
Music
Portrait view
Arts/Culture
Current Affairs
Education/Information
Infotainment
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.
To view a
programme list for
another day
≥Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
3 Press [OK].
≥Jump back 24 hours
≥A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.
Press the “Red” button.
≥When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
When jumping, the selected time period
may deviate.
e.g.,
TV Guide
SAT 13/01/08 19:45
ABC 1
News
All DVB Services
Programme type, “News” is
selected in step 2 of
Landscape view.
SAT 13/01 Landscape
Emmerdale: In today’s show we will...
To browse through
the TV Guide list
Press [W X CH].
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
News
News
To see programme
information
Press [STATUS
].
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time,
description) is available for these
programmes.
News
(Programmes with the
Select Service
Info
OPTION
Page
OK
symbol)
CH
Select Programme
RETURN
GUIDE
+24 Hr
Portrait/Landscape
Page
-24 Hr
Prog. type
Favourites
Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.
To show other pages
[Note]
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and groups sent from broadcast
stations is correct.
Press [STATUS
programme list.
] again to return to the
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme.
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected
the programme type or favourites
Select “All Types” of the programme type or “All DVB Services” of the
favourites in step 2 above.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TV Guide data download
≥Download automatically while the unit is on.
RQT9135
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced playback
[Note]
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 84).
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” (➡ 84) may not be able to playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording. You will be
able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change back the settings before
the recording starts.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen
and so on.
Operation during play
≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.
Press [∫].
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
≥[HDD] : Stopped position for each title is memorized.
≥Discs: Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[AVCHD] (SD card): Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
Search
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title or chapter you want to play.
Skip
≥It will skip to the beginning of chapters (➡ 44) if the title contains chapters.
≥[HDD] It will not skip the title. But the title in the grouped titles during the “Grouped Playback” (➡ 40) will be
skipped.
Press the numbered buttons.
Starting from a
Play starts from the selected title or chapter.
selected title
≥[AVCHD]
Input a 3-digit number
e.g.,
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥[DVD-V]
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥While stopped (the screen on the right is displayed on the television), the title is
designated. While playing, the chapter is designated.
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Quick View
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Except [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
≥Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR mode titles or [AVCHD].
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Slow-motion
≥[AVCHD] and title that has copied AVCHD
Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [AVCHD]).
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
Each press shows the next frame.
Frame-by-frame
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[AVCHD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
≥Frame-by-frame backward for titles that have copied the AVCHD will be in 10 frame units.
RQT9135
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
Skipping the
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time and press [OK].
specified time
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute intervals. (Press and
hold for 10-minute intervals.)
(Time Slip)
Except [DVD-V] [AVCHD]
This automatically disappears after approximately 5 seconds. To show the
-5 min.
screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Manual Skip
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 1 minute later.
Except [DVD-V] [AVCHD]
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen (➡ 75)
Aspect
Chapters are divided at the point pressed. (➡ 44)
Create Chapter
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
Display the subtitle during play
It is possible to display the subtitles during the playback if the
programme with subtitle is recorded with DR mode.
It will switch depending on the contents recorded every time it is
pressed.
Press [STTL ].
e.g., [HDD] “AudioL R” is selected.
≥It will switch between On/Off every time it is pressed.
HDD
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
PLAY
Display with “Subtitle” in the Disc menu (➡ 74, Subtitle).
Audio LR
eng
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 74, Soundtrack).
1 ENG
CꢀDigital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
e.g., English is selected.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided)
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
first layer to record a programme, the remainder is recorded on the second
layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal
programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit
is switching layers.
Second recordable layer
The available
space
First recordable layer
Title 1
Title 2
(Inner
section of the
disc)
Playback direction
(Outersection
of the disc)
DVD-R DL
+R DL
RQT9135
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator
Direct Navigator screen icons
Playback the title that was viewed
once [HDD]
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
You can choose to start the playback from the point you have last
stopped, or from the beginning when the resume play function
(➡ 38) is operating.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection
t
Title cannot be played
(When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.)
1 While the Direct Navigator screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Last Played” or “Beginning” and
press [OK].
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 35, Relief Recording)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 110, CPRM)
To sort the titles for easy searching
[HDD] (All Titles screen only)
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.
([HDD] only)
1 Press [OPTION].
Title recorded using a different encoding system
(NTSC)
(PAL)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, the sort will be cancelled.
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➡ 84).
To play grouped titles [HDD]
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)
Switching of the Navigator
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]
It is possible to switch the screen display with the following operation
even in the COPY Navigator or the DELETE Navigator screens.
∫ Play the selected titles
1 Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press [OK].
1 While the Navigator screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
∫ Play the titles continuously (Grouped Playback)
While the Grouped Titles screen is displaying,
Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [1] (PLAY).
e.g.,
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
Release Grouping
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)
All Titles
PICTURE / MUSIC
1 Press [3, 4] to select a title or a group and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode
are bundled and displayed as one item.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press
Create Group
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
MUSIC
[OK].
Release Grouping
Date
25.05
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Titles
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
01.01 AV2
1:35
Create Group:
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
0:00(DR)
Not viewed
Release Grouping:
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].
≥All the titles in the group are released.
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
Remove:
Select the item marked with
bundled titles.
and press [OK] to display the
(Only when titles in a group have been selected)
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove” and press [OK].
Selected titles are removed from the group.
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
∫ Regarding the group name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles
Time Remaining
45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Name of title
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
No. Date Day Name Time
001
12:36 Born And Bred:
25.05 SAT
A
Wrathful
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Time Remaining 45:54 DR
HDD
Grouped Titles
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
Play School: Food Friday
002 25.05 SAT
12:37
AV2
01.01 SUN
01.01 SUN AV1
1:35
003
004
VIDEO
Name of title
12:36 Born And Bred: A Wrathful Go
HDD
MUSIC
PICTURE
MUSIC
PICTURE
1:13
Rec time
Date
25.05
01.01 AV2
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Titles
Date
Name Time
0:00(DR)
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
25.05
25.05
1:35
12:37 Play School: Food Friday
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Not viewed
Rec time
ec time
0:00(DR)
0:00(DR)
Page 01/01
Select
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
Not viewed
Not viewed
RETURN
PICTURE
MUSIC
Page 01/01
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OPTION
Select
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
OK
RETURN
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
To change the group name
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select the group and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK].
Enter the name. (➡ 71, Entering text)
≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
RQT9135
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback of the High Definition Camera Video (AVCHD)
[AVCHD]
It is possible to playback the high definition (AVCHD format) video
recorded on the Panasonic digital high definition video camera on
the disc or SD card.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To display the top menu
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
1 Insert a disc or SD card.
When the top menu or the “Direct Navigator” is not displayed
Refer to “Starting from a selected title” (➡ 38) to playback.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play AVCHD”
and press [OK].
.
Operation during play (➡ 38)
e.g., [RAM]
[Note]
DVD-RAM ( AVCHD )
Play AVCHD
≥Multiple titles may not playback continuously depending on the
disc. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], and playback by selecting the
title.
Copy AVCHD
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Exit
≥It may pause for a few seconds on the break of images when
editing such as partial deletion is performed.
≥[SD] It cannot playback while recording.
This disc is play-only and cannot be recorded or
copied to.
OK
RETURN
e.g., [SD]
SD Card
Play AVCHD
Copy AVCHD
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
≥If the top menu of the disc or SD card to play is
– Created:
Display the top menu
– Not created: Display the “Direct Navigator” screen§
§ It may not be able to display the “Direct Navigator” screen
depending on the equipment used to record.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [OK].
e.g., [SD] Direct Navigator screen
DIRECT NAVIGATOR AVCHD
VIDEO
SD CARD
No. Date Day Time
001 15.12 SAT 19:36
Name of title
Fantasista
12:35 2007.12.07
002 07.12 FRI
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Rec time
00:00.07
Page 01/01
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
Playback of the Playlist created on other equipment
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
playlist and press [OK].
Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Playlists
DVD-RAM
Playlist View
- -
01
02
05.06(THU) 0:12.12
- -
05.07(MON) 0:07:31
- -
- -
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Previous
Next
Page 01/01
OK
OPTION
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
RETURN
and press [OK].
Operation during play (➡ 38)
FUNCTION MENU
DVD-RAM
Time Remaining
4:00 EP
To return to the previous screen
Playback
Timer Recording
Press [RETURN].
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Recording
Delete
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DV Auto Rec
Recording via AV3 input
Setup
Copy
To Others
OK
DVD Management
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
RQT9135
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles
[HDD] [RAM]
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)
[+RW]
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
Editing of the title can be performed with this unit.
For example, an unrequired part of the title can be deleted. (➡ 43,
Partial Delete)
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Date
25.05
01.01 AV2
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Titles
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
0:00(DR)
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
[Note]
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Multiple editing
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
3 Press [OPTION].
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
≥[-RW‹VR›] Only “Properties” is possible.
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
Preparation
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
press [OK].
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 77, Setting the protection).
Enter Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
Play
Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 43).
Delete
Properties
Edit
Divide Title
Change Thumbnail
Chapter View
Edit or playback the chapter (➡ 45)
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (➡ 40)
Switching of the Navigator (➡ 40)
Create Group
Release Grouping
All Titles
PICTURE / MUSIC
≥Playing still pictures (➡ 58)
≥Playing music recorded on HDD
(➡ 65)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9135
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 42)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (➡ 26).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
Properties
Properties
Dinosaur
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Name ARD
You can give names to recorded titles.
Enter Name
(➡ 71, Entering text)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.
Set up Protection§
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
Group
Time Remain
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Cancel Protection§
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
Date
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
25.05
01.01 AV
01.01 AV
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
Partial Delete
Time Remaining
HDD
20:08 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Start
End
section you want to delete.
(➡ below, For your reference)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to start the playback when the title is paused.
Next
Continue
0:43.21
2Press [3, 4] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections. Up to 20 sections
can be set. (➡ go to step 1)
Please set the start
point with playback
operation and skip.
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
Press RETURN to end Partial Delete function.
RETURN
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Chapter Mark is generated in the scene that was partially deleted.
You can divide a title into two.
Divide Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
Time Remaining
HDD
20:08 DR VIDEO
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Continue” and press [OK].
PICTURE MUSIC
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Divide
(➡ below, For your reference)
Preview
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
Continue
0:43.21
To confirm the division point
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
Divide
- -:- -.- -
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the
point where you want to divide the title.
OK
RETURN
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 110) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after finalising.
Change Thumbnail
[+RW] It is possible to change the image displayed on the top menu after creating Top Menu.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[HDD] Settings for the “Change Thumbnail” is saved when high speed copy
is performed to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL or +RW.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR ChangeThumbnail
HDD
Time Remaining
20:08 DR VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
(➡ below, For your reference)
008
Change
≥
Not for the titles with
displayed
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
Finish
0:00.00
thumbnail is shown.
Start play and select the image of
Change
a thumbnail.
To change the thumbnail
- -:- -.- -
OK
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at the
point you want to change.
RETURN
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
§
Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use Search (➡ 38), Time Slip (➡ 39) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 38) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 38).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT9135
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter
[HDD] [RAM]
Create Chapter Mark
During the playback or pause
Regarding Chapters
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
≥Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
Title
Chapter
Start
End
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points (Chapter Marks) becomes a
chapter.
Title
Chapter has been created.
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
∫ To delete the Chapter Mark
1 While paused
Press [:, 9] and skip to the location you
want to delete.
Chapter Mark
2 Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The maximum number of chapters on a disc:
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[HDD] : Approx. 1000 per title
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] :Approx. 1000
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Approx. 254
[Note]
≥[HDD] You will not be able to perform the Resume play function
(➡ 38) or the “Change Thumbnail” (➡ 43) with a title with the
maximum number of chapters.
≥[HDD] Chapter Marks created will be maintained when copied. But,
it will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum
chapter numbers.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Only playback is
possible.
RQT9135
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing and playing chapters
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ left)
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Select the point where you want to start a
Create
Chapter
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
new chapter while viewing the title.
Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Date
25.05
01.01 AV2
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Titles
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Edit Chapter Mark
1:35
Time Remaining
HDD
15:08 SP VIDEO
PICTURE MUSIC
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Rec time
SOCCER
Play
007
0:00(DR)
To insert chapter position,
press CREATE CHAPTER at
selected time.
Press RETURN to go to
Chapter View.
Not viewed
Page 01/01
Select
PICTURE
OK
OPTION
VIDEO
0:00.00
RETURN
MUSIC
Play
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
OK
RETURN
Chapter View
Edit Chapter Mark
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
1Press [CREATE CHAPTER] at
the point you want to divide.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other
points.
press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”
2Press [RETURN] to go to
and press [OK].
Chapter View screen.
4 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter.
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 5.
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
To create ➡ Press the “Green” button. (➡ right)
Delete
and press [OK].
Chapter§
Chapter View screen
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are
lost and cannot be restored. Make
certain before proceeding.
Time Remaining 15:08 SP VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE MUSIC
Play
SOCCER
007
Press OK to start playing from
the selected chapter.
Selected chapter can be edited
via OPTION.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below)
when you only want to delete the division
point between chapters. (The recorded
contents will not be deleted.)
Press RETURN to go back to
previous menu.
0:00.00
001
0:00.00
Page 001/001
OPTION
Select
OK
RETURN
Chapter View
Edit Chapter Mark
Press [2, 1] to select
Combine
Chapters
“Combine” and press [OK].
≥The selected chapter and following chapter
are combined.
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Delete Chapter
Combine Chapters
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9135
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
There are following copying methods.
Copy
Easy copying from HDD to disc with no difficult settings. (➡ 27)
Copy Title Playing
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc. (➡ 49)
Make a copying list and then copy.
Advanced Copy
Copy AVCHD
You can set the unit to copy titles in the way you want. (➡ 50)
High definition video (AVCHD format) can be copied from disc, SD card, or USB. (➡ 56)
∫ Copy direction
Possible copying
Copy source
Copy destination
Copy speed
method
≥The high speed copy may not be
possible depending on the destination
disc or the title to copy. (➡ 48, When is
the time high speed copy is not
possible?)
Copy
Copy Title Playing
Advanced Copy
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[HDD]
[RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
[HDD]
[HDD]
Advanced Copy
Advanced Copy
High speed
[+RW]
Normal speed
Before finalise
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
Cannot copy
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[DVD-V]
After finalise
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[HDD]
Advanced Copy
Normal speed
High speed
[HDD] [RAM]
Advanced Copy
Cannot copy
SD Video (MPEG2 format)
≥From an SD card or a
video equipment (from
USB)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
HD Video (AVCHD format)
[HDD]
[HDD]
Copy AVCHD
Copy AVCHD
Cannot copy
High speed
High speed
≥From discs
HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥From an SD card or a
video equipment (from
USB)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
RQT9135
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Copy speed
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Features
It will take same or longer time as the recorded time
of the copying title.
Copy with shorter time than the recorded time of the
title with same quality (recording mode).
≥
If you select a recording mode with better picture quality
than the original, the picture quality does not improve.
§1
Are chapters maintained?
≤
–
–
Are thumbnails
maintained?
≤
Recording and Playing while
Copying
§2
–
≤
§1 Position of the chapter might shift slightly.
It will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers.
–[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] :Approx. 1000
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] :Approx. 100
(Depends on the state of recording.)
§2 Possible only with titles on the HDD
[However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video (MPEG2 format) or when copying HD Video
(AVCHD format).]
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–Still pictures or music cannot be played.
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
HDD
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
16X Speed
4X Speed
6X Speed
DVD-RW§3
8X Speed
+R§4
4X Speed
+R DL§2
4X Speed
+RW
DVD-R§1
DVD-R DL§2
Recording
Mode
XP
SP
LP
EP (6H)
EP (8H)
Recorded
Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed
time
12 min.
6 min.
3 min.
2 min.
1 min. 30 s.
time
5 min. 46 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 21 s.
58 s.
time
time
time
time
time
1 hour
5x
10x
24x
44x
62x
75x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 53 s.
4x
8x
16x
24x
32x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 57 s.
4x
8x
16x
24x
31x
8 min. 20 s.
3 min. 45 s.
1 min. 53 s.
7x
16x
32x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
4x
8x
16x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
4x
8x
16x
10x
20x
30x
40x
1
48 s.
≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
RQT9135
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
∫ Frequently asked questions
When is the time high speed copy is not
possible?
It will copy at normal speed in following cases:
≥[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Copying to in following conditions:
– Titles in DR mode
– Title of the AVCHD copied to the HDD
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Copying to in following conditions:
– Copy including a title that was recorded to HDD with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to
“Off”
– Titles that contain many deleted segments.
– Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic digital video
camera with HDD (SD Video).
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”
mode.
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or
longer) mode
≥Setting the “Recording Mode” to anything but “High Speed” in “Advanced Copy”
≥Copying from +RW to HDD
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] When copying from the finalised disc to HDD
When copying titles in high speed mode to
high speed recording compatible discs
The sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High
Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 82).
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When copying to disc in normal speed
mode
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the
HDD and then copied at high speed to the disc. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to the disc in the following cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new blank disc, if
you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be copied to
the disc is greater than 499 in total.
When stopping the copy during copy
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only recording” restriction,
only titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles
that are cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily
copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the
step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point
canceled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card,
or USB memory after copying HD video
(AVCHD format) to the HDD?
≥It can be copied to the disc.
– It will be copied with SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)
≥It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
RQT9135
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
Copy Title Playing
For titles in DR mode
Normal speed (FR mode)
Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc.
≥It will start copying from the beginning of the title regardless of the
playing position.
For titles in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
≥[RAM]
–High speed (recording mode as is)
[When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space,
copy will perform at normal speed.]
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Titles recorded with the “Rec for High Speed Copy” settings
“On”: High speed (recording mode as is)
“Off”: Normal speed (Recording mode of playing title)
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
1 Playback the title to copy.
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” do not match.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
When copying the title in DR mode with multiple audio
and subtitles
≥Only the audio selected in the “Multi Audio” of the Disc menu
will be copied for the multiple audio. (➡ 74)
≥Subtitle will not be copied.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Title
Playing” and press [OK].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
(Only when high speed copying)
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD
regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying)
RQT9135
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode, only titles
indicated with “ ” can be registered.
≥To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
Copying using the copying list—
Advanced Copy
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
4 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 51)
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (➡ 51)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
You can order titles as desired for copy to disc.
5 Press [2] to confirm.
1
While stopped
7 Set to make it possible to play on
other equipment.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
(“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”)
([HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] only)
and press [OK].
Press [4] if it is not to be set (➡ step 8)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Other setting” and press [1].
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
≥If “On” is selected
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
Advanced Copy
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or
edit.
–[+RW] Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before
playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
Cancel All
Source
HDD
DVD
1 Copy Direction
HDD DVD
Destination
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
Information of the copy destination
-
-
DVD-RAM
Copy restricted titles can be
3 Create List
0
copied on to disc
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
4 Press [2] to confirm.
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“DVD”, or vice versa. (➡ Go to step 6)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be copied.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
press [OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
5 Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
≥Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD
regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
6 Register titles for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Advanced Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
(
0% )
Size:
0MB
Title
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
HDD DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
3 Create List
0
Start Copying
Page 01/01
OK
Create copy list.
OPTION
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Create List Grouped Titles
HDD
Date
25.05
01.01 AV2
Name Time
12:36
Name of title Title
Born And Bred:
A
Wrathful
2
1
1:35
01.01 AV1
1:13
1
Time
12:36
Rec time 0:52(SP)
Page 01/01
Select
OK
RETURN
OPTION
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
RQT9135
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
Navigator/Copying list
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
Titles that can be copied in high speed mode to
the inserted disc
[OPTION].
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 29, When recording the “One time only
recording” broadcasts)
Properties
Sort
Grouped Titles
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying. (➡ 29, When
recording the “One time only recording”
broadcasts)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [OK].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
Title contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Sort (All Titles screen only):
Title recorded using a different encoding system
(NTSC)
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator/Copying list screen, the display
order is cancelled.
from that of the TV system currently selected on
(PAL)
the unit.
≥Titles displaying these marks cannot be
selected.
Data size of each registered item
Size:
∫ To edit the copying list
Delete All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
(
0% )
Size:
0MB
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
Select the item in step 6–4 (➡ 50)
No. Size
Title
New item (Total=0)
1 Press [OPTION].
Add
≥When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
Delete
Move
[OK].
≥The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
Delete All:
Page 01/01
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1
Press [3, 4] to select the title and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
2
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 50)
1
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
RQT9135
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles
4
When the top menu is displayed
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
2
03
Chapter
04
Chapter
3
4
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 82) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 82) of the Setup menu.
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To stop copying
Press [∫].
Preparation
≥Insert the finalised disc (➡ 15).
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
Video”) (➡ 50, Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy)
[Note]
1 Set “Copy Time”.
≥The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 2).
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start
of copy to the end.
∫ Setting the unit to copy according to the set
time
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 50, Copying
using the copying list—Advanced Copy).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Advanced Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD HDD
2
Hour
00 Min.
2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video SP
Set the time
a
few minutes longer.
3 Copy Time
2:00
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
Press OK to change the setting.
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press
[3, 4] to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (➡ 79).
RQT9135
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording broadcasts from external equipment
[HDD]
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 28).
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 terminals on the front
≥Turn off the unit and external equipment before connecting.
This unit
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R
S VIDEO
AV3 IN
Yellow White Red
S Video
cable§
Audio/Video
cable
External equipment
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
§
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 84).
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
≥DR, FR mode cannot be selected.
3 Select the channel on the other
equipment.
4 Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT9135
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying from a video cassette recorder
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
Manual recording
[HDD]
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 28, Important notes for
recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 84).
This unit
1
While stopped
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R
S VIDEO
DV IN
AV3 IN
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
Yellow White Red
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
S Video
cable§
Audio/Video
cable
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
Other video equipment
recording mode.
≥DR, FR mode cannot be selected.
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
3 Start play on the other equipment.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
4
When you want to start recording
§
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
≥Use only DV cable with ferrite core.
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (➡ 83).
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 82) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 82) of the Setup menu.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Using Flexible Recording (➡ 32)
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
Recording of 16:9 image such as wide broadcasting (➡ 28)
[Note]
≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
≥While copying from DV input or executing the “Recording via AV3
input”
–Copy will stop when timer recording starts.
–Chasing playback, simultaneous rec and play, switching of the
broadcast or input cannot be performed.
RQT9135
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Recording via AV3 input
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
It is possible to record to disc from equipment connected to the AV3
input terminals.
Preparation
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ 54).
Turn on the main unit.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 84).
2
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 84).
1
While stopped
1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause
play at the point you want recording to
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
start.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
The following screen appears.
and press [OK].
DV Auto Rec
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording via
Record from the DV unit?
AV3 input” and press [OK].
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
≥It may take a while for the next screen to display while
preparing to record.
OK
RETURN
Please set recording time.
Recording via AV3 input
Record in FR mode.
≥When the screen is not displayed
Max rec time 8 Hour 00 Min.
After performing step 1
8
00
Min.
Set rec time
Hour
Start Cancel
1
2
3
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
OK
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].
➡ Go to step 2
RETURN
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rec to HDD”
recording time.
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
≥It may take a while for the next screen to display while
buttons.
preparing to record.
5 Start play on the other equipment.
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the
6
When you want to start recording
recording mode.
≥DR, FR mode cannot be selected.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
≥Record in FR mode.
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording
Press [∫].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
[Note]
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
[Note]
≥[-R] It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times of
step 3 or recording or editing.
≥[+R] [+RW] Chapters for every 8 minutes are created automatically.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥[-R] It may not be able to record after repeating about 30 times of
step 2 or recording or editing.
≥[+R] [+RW] Chapters for every 8 minutes are created automatically.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ 54).
RQT9135
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copy the HD Video (AVCHD format) or the SD Video (MPEG 2 format)
It is possible to copy the HD video (AVCHD format) or the SD video (MPEG 2 format) recorded on the Panasonic digital video camera to the HDD
or disc.
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
∫ From an SD card or Discs
∫ From a video equipment
[AVCHD] (Disc) > [HDD]
Camera’s HDD > [HDD]
[AVCHD] (SD card) > [HDD]
≥You cannot playback HD Video in the camera’s HDD with this
unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD.
HDD
HDD
HDD
1 Insert a disc or card.
e.g., [SD]
Preparation
Turn on both this unit and the camera.
SD Card
Play AVCHD
Copy AVCHD
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
1 Connect the camera to this unit.
2 Select the appropriate mode that
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
makes the camera ready for data
transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy AVCHD”
the camera.
and press [OK].
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
e.g.,
Copy AVCHD
SD
Destination Capacity: 472583MB
Size:
0MB( 0%) Total
:
0
HDD
USB device
Copy AVCHD
No. Date Day Name Time
Name of title
Time
Rec time 0:10
Size 120 MB
18:19
001
25.05 SAT
12:36
12:37
1:35
002 25.05 SAT
01.01 SUN
003
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
01.01 SUN
004
1:13
USB device is inserted.
Page 01/01
OK
Select
OK
RETURN
OPTION
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy AVCHD”
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
and press [OK].
press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
4 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
4 Press [OK].
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
5 Press [OK].
press [OK].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
[Note]
≥Record, playback, or timer recording cannot be executed while copying.
≥Title with more than 256 scenes cannot be copied.
≥Copied video will be displayed as “AVCHD” in the “Name” column of the Direct Navigator screen.
≥Depending on the recording condition with the high definition camera, scenes recorded on same day might have different titles (“-1”, “-2”
appended to date).
≥See the instructions of the equipment used to record.
RQT9135
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying SD Video (MPEG 2 format)
∫ From a video equipment
∫ From an SD card
Camera’s HDD > [HDD] [RAM]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this
unit.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
HDD
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
1 Insert a card.
e.g.,
Preparation
Turn on both this unit and the camera.
SD Card
Play AVCHD
Copy AVCHD
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
1 Connect the camera to this unit.
2 Select the appropriate mode that
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
makes the camera ready for data
≥If there are no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video
(MPEG2)” is not displayed.
transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on
the camera.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
(MPEG2)” and press [OK].
e.g.,
3 Go to step 8 on page 50.
USB device
Copy AVCHD
How to copy
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy”
(➡ 50)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
USB device is inserted.
Copy Direction:
Source :SD CARD
OK
RETURN
Copy Mode:
Format :VIDEO
≥If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video
(MPEG2)” is not displayed.
≥SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the
copy list.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video
(MPEG2)” and press [OK].
4 Go to step 8 on page 50.
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy”
(➡ 50)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source :USB
Copy Mode:
Format :VIDEO
≥SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the
copy list.
RQT9135
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB] [SD]
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a CD-R/
CD-RW and USB memory.
[HDD] [RAM]
≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc, card, or USB memory.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
[HDD] [RAM]
To switch the display method
Still pictures copied from SD cards and USB memories are
grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album
(➡ 60).
The display below automatically appears when you insert a SD
card, USB memory, or the CD while stopped.
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Pictures (JPEG)” or “JPEG” and
press [OK].
1 Press [OPTION].
Then go to step 3 (➡ right).
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
and press [OK].
≥[CD] It will go to step 3 (➡ right) automatically if it is only still
pictures that is recorded.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pictures by Date
Time Remaining
Pictures by Date screen
20:08 DR
e.g.,
[SD]
PICTURE
MUSIC
VIDEO
001
002
Date:08.09.2006
Total 19
Date:04.02.2007
Total
SD Card
Play AVCHD
9
Copy AVCHD
Select
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
Slide Show
OPTION
VIDEO
OK
PICTURE
MUSIC
RETURN
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
[CD] [SD] “Picture (JPEG) View” is displayed. (➡ go to step 3).
[USB]
Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture and Album protected.
USB device
Copy AVCHD
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Date that has not yet been viewed
(Only still pictures copied with “Copy All Pictures” or
“Copy New Pictures”)
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
[CD]
CD
JPEG
MP3
2
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album or date and press [OK].
Select file type.
OK
RETURN
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
e.g., HDD
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
≥Display contents differs depending on what is recorded in each
04.02.2007
media.
ꢀ
Page 001/001
OK
OPTION
Select
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 59)
To return to previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9135
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start Slide
Show
1 [HDD] [RAM] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or date.
2 Press [OPTION].
≥[HDD] [RAM] Slide show will start by pressing [1] (PLAY).
Slide Show
Setting
Start Slide Show
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].
≥To change the display interval
Slide Show Setting
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 3 and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and press [OK].
≥Repeat Play
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 3 and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and press [OK].
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] Playback the music
Sample music in this unit or music stored on the HDD (My Favourite or Playlist) can be played during the playback of
the slide show.
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 3 and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Soundtrack”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On”.
Select Soundtrack
Please select music playlist for soundtrack.
ꢀ
Sample Soundtrack
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and press [OK].
My Favourites
01
02
03
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] Change the music to playback
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 3 and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the music playlist and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and press [OK].
OK
RETURN
To end the slide show
Press [RETURN].
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
Rotate
Rotate RIGHT
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
–[CD] [USB] Still pictures
Rotate LEFT
OK
RETURN
–When disc or card is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
–When changing date
≥If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation information may not
be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate RIGHT
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” and press [OK].
Rotate LEFT
≥Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” in step 2 and press [OK] to resume the display size of the still
picture.
Zoom out
OK
RETURN
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The zoom out information will not be stored.
≥This function is only available for small-sized still pictures.
While playing
Properties
2:00
01.01.2006
e.g., HDD
Remain HDD 230:04 SP
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Press [STATUS
] twice.
Date
1. 1. 2008
No.
3 / 9
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS ].
Shooting date
[RAM] (Only when there is another compatible folder in upper level folder when displaying Album View screen)
Switch the
folder
Switch the upper level folder
While the Album View screen is displayed
Select Folder
1 Press [OPTION].
Select folder to access.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the folder and press [OK].
\JPEG\DCIM001
Press OK to set.
OK
RETURN
[CD]
While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
JPEG MENU
CD ( JPEG )
Folder
JPEG
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [OK].
F
7/25
001 My favorite
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the folder and press [OK].
001 Brazilian
002 Chinese
003 Czech
004 Hungarian
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese
007 Mexican
008 Philippine
009 Swedish
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
OK
RETURN
RQT9135
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing still pictures
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
and press [OK].
(e.g., [HDD] Pictures by Date)
≥Editing can be done in units of pictures, albums, or dates.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on CD-R/CD-RW and USB
memory.
Album View
Useful functions during still picture
Start Slide Show
play (➡ 59)
Slide Show Setting
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 11, 77, Setting the protection).
Copy pictures of the date
Copy to Album
Copy to New Album
Copy to DVD-RAM
Change Date
Delete pictures of the date
VIDEO / MUSIC
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM]
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
[HDD] [RAM]
To switch the display method
1 Press [OPTION].
(e.g., [HDD] Album View)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
and press [OK].
Useful functions during still picture
Pictures by Date
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
play (➡ 59)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pictures by Date
Pictures by Date screen
Copy to Album
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
001
002
Copy to New Album
Copy to DVD-RAM
Date:08.09.2006
Total 19
Date:04.02.2007
Total
Copy Album
Edit Album
9
PICTURE
Enter Album Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Delete Album
Press OK to display pictures.
Page 01/01
Slide Show
OPTION
Select
OK
VIDEO
MUSIC
RETURN
VIDEO / MUSIC
[SD] “Picture (JPEG) View” is displayed. (➡ go to step 2,
Editing a still picture).
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
2
Editing an album or date:
Select the album or date to be edited
and press [OPTION].
(e.g., [HDD] Picture (JPEG) View)
Editing a still picture:
1Select the album or date which contains the
Useful functions during still picture
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
Copy Pictures
play (➡ 59)
still picture to edit and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
e.g., HDD
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
04.02.2007
Copy to Album
ꢀ
Copy to New Album
Edit Pictures
Delete Pictures
Change Date
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Pictures by Date
Page 001/001
OK
OPTION
Select
RETURN
2Select the still pictures to edit and press
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
[OPTION].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
(e.g., [SD] )
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 59)
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Edit Pictures
Delete Pictures
Still pictures operation (➡ 61)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9135
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures operation
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
Copy to Album§
Copy the selected album, date, or pictures to an existing album.
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the destination album and press [OK].
≥The destination album with protect setting cannot be copied to.
Copy to New Album§
Copy the selected album, date, or pictures to new album.
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
2Press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
3Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No”and press [OK].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (➡ 71, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
Date of the first recorded picture in the album becomes the album name automatically.
(If there is no information about the recording date, it will become “--.--.----”.)
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
Copy to DVD-RAM
[HDD]
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
Change Date§
1Press [2, 1] to select the item and press [3, 4] to change.
2Press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
≥Date of the original is maintained. Delete if unrequired.
≥If the changed date already exists, pictures will be moved to that date.
(Pictures by Date only)
You can give names to albums.
Enter Album Name
[HDD] [RAM]
(Album View only)
(➡ 71, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album may be deleted
by another unit.
Delete Pictures of the date§
Delete Album§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Delete Pictures§
≥[RAM] If there is a file other than DCF format or other folder exists in the date or album, only the
pictures will be deleted, and the date or the album itself will not be deleted.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
[Copy to Album, Copy to New Album, Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Copy to Album”, “Copy to New Album”, “Change Date”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
RQT9135
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [USB] [SD]
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
≥Pictures copied from SD card and USB memory will be
categorised according to the shooting date. Pictures without
recording date will be categorised using the creation date.
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to CD-R/CD-RW.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 109), copying will
stop partway through.
Copy from
SD CARD
Copy to
HDD
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥Timer recording will not start while copying still pictures.
Copy added pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
Copy Cancel
OK
RETURN
Copying all the still pictures on the USB
memory—Copy All Pictures
[USB] > [HDD]
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
≥Protection of the card is
– Set: Copy will start
1
While stopped
– Not set: Go to step 4
Insert the USB memory.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No”
The menu is automatically displayed.
and press [OK].
USB device
Copy AVCHD
If “Yes” is selected
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copied pictures in the SD card will be deleted after copying.
If “No” is selected
Pictures will not be deleted.
USB device is inserted.
≥
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
Direct Navigator for the added pictures.
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
[Note]
Copy from
USB
≥This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and 30
SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older
information will be deleted.
Copy to
HDD
Copy all pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
Copy Cancel
Copying using the copying list
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
OK
RETURN
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
1
While stopped
press [OK].
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
≥
will be displayed on the Pictures by Date screen of the
Direct Navigator for the added pictures.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
at the copy destination.
Advanced Copy
Cancel All
Source
SD CARD
HDD
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD HDD
Destination
Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
0
[SD] > [HDD]
Start Copying
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new still
pictures will be imported.
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
1
While stopped
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
Insert the SD card.
The menu is automatically displayed.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be copied.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
SD Card
Play AVCHD
Copy AVCHD
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
SD card is inserted.
OK
RETURN
5 Set the copy mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
RQT9135
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Note]
6 Register still pictures for copy.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
≥Pictures from different dates or albums will not be registered
to same list.
Advanced Copy
To show other pages
≥Press [:, 9].
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
1 Copy Direction
By Picture
(
Date
)
New Item
No.
HDD DVD
Size
Title
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
∫ To edit the copying list
PICTURE High Speed
Select the item in step 6–3 (➡ left)
3 Create List
0
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
Delete All
Add
Page 01/01
Start Copying
OK
Create copy list.
OPTION
RETURN
[OK].
Delete
Delete All:
∫Select the units to register [HDD] [RAM]
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Item” and press [OK].
Add:
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Add new items to the copying list.
By Picture ( Date )
New Item
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
2
By Picture ( Date )
By Picture ( Album )
By Date Folder
By Album
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing step 1–3 (➡ 62, Copying using the copying list)
≥[SD] Selection of units to register cannot be done. It can only
be registered in picture units.
1
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
Register with By Picture (Date/Album)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
∫ To select another folder
After performing step 6–2 [➡ left, Register with By Picture (Date/
Album)]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the folder and press [OK].
≥[RAM] Switch the upper level folder (➡ 59)
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
≥To select another folder (➡ right)
3
4
Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (➡ right)
Press [2] to confirm.
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
Register with By Date Folder/By Album
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
≥[RAM] Switch the upper level folder (➡ 59)
3
4
Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (➡ right)
Press [2] to confirm.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
≥[Only when copied with “By Picture (Album)” from [HDD] to
[RAM], or from [RAM] to [HDD]]
When specifying another album as the copying destination,
select “Albums”.
Album
New album
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT9135
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Playing MP3 files
Playing music CD
Insert a music CD.
[CD] [USB]
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a CD-R/CD-
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (➡ 69) and
RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while copying.
searches for the title information.
1 Insert a disc or USB memory.
P O W E R E D B Y
CD
USB device
Copy AVCHD
JPEG
MP3
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Select file type.
OK
USB device is inserted.
RETURN
OK
RETURN
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
≥[CD] Playback will automatically start if only MP3 is recorded.
≥Playback will automatically start.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “MP3”or “Play/
0.09
4.30
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD
Music List
March Moon
Copy Music (MP3)” and press [OK].
Do this flower open?
No.
Track Name
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
≥Playback will automatically start.
March Moon
01
02
03
04
05
Playing track
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
0.09
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD ( MP3 )
Music List
March Moon
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
Folder: Mexican pops
No.
Track Name
Artist
Playing track
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
0001 March Moon
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
0002
0003
0004
0005
OK
RETURN
If eastern wind has gone
Slide show
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
OPTION
Slide show
OK
RETURN
Copy All
to HDD
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
Reacquire the CD title
Press the “Yellow” button.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback of track will stop.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback of track will stop.
Using the tree screen to find a group
[CD] [USB]
1 While the Music list is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [OK].
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
0.09
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Select Folder
March Moon
CD ( MP3 )
MP3 music
001 My favorite
F
7/27
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
You cannot select
groups that contain no
compatible files.
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
OK
RETURN
002 Standard number
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[OK].
The Music list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT9135
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
Playing music recorded on HDD
Copying music to HDD (➡ 69)
press [OK].
0.09
4.30
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music List
March Moon
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
Do this flower open?
No.
Track Name
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
0001 March Moon
Playing track
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
0002
0003
0004
0005
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
If eastern wind has gone
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
OPTION
Slide show
OK
RETURN
Add to My
Favourites
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Playing different track
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press [OK].
Artists
Albums
To return to the previous screen
My Favourites
Playlists
Press [RETURN].
Frequently Played
Random Play
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback of track will stop.
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
[Note]
≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while copying.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 10 minutes during
music playback, the screen saver is displayed [only when the
“Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 84).]. To return
to the previous screen, press [RETURN].
press [OK].
Artists
Albums
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
Random Play
1 Categorise by artist
2 Categorise by album
3 Tracks registered in “My Favourites”
4 Tracks registered in “Playlists”
5 Tracks played most within 200 tracks played recently (up to
30 Tracks)
6 Random playback of all tracks
∫When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist, and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
∫When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
RQT9135
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
Useful functions during music play
Operations during play
Press [∫].
Stop
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
Search
Skip
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
During play or while paused,
press [:] or [9].
Skip to the track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
While Music list screen is displayed
Press [3, 4] to select the track and press the “Green” button.
≥Up to 99 tracks can be registered.
Register a track to
the “My Favourites”
[HDD]
While Music list screen is displayed
Properties
1
2
Press [OPTION].
[HDD]
Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press [OK].
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Repeat Play
Random
Press [3, 4] to select “Play” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” or “Random” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the item.
≥Repeat Play
“All”:
Repeatedly playback the selected album, etc.
“Track”: Repeatedly playback the selected track
≥Random
“On”:
“Off”
Randomly playback the selected album, etc.
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher frequency signals not recorded on the track.
Re-master
1
2
3
4
Press [DISPLAY].
Press [3, 4] to select “Sound” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Sound Effects” and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Re-master1” or “Re-master2”.
≥“V.Surround1” or “V.Surround2” is displayed, but there is no effect even if it is set.
≥This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when
“Digital Audio Output” is set to “PCM”. (However, in this case, audio is output as 2ch.)
Sample pictures in this unit or pictures stored on the “Album View” of the HDD can be played back as slide show
during playback of the music.
Display Still
Pictures
(Slide show)
While playing the music
Press the “Red” button.
Change the pictures to display
Select Picture Album
1
2
3
Press [OPTION].
Please select the album to start slide show.
Press [3, 4] to select “Select Picture Album” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OK].
ꢀSample Pictures
My Favourites
My Travel
While playing music a picture slide show
can be displayed.
OK
RETURN
To end the slide show
Press [RETURN].
≥It will also end when the music is stopped.
When the unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) that supports HDAVI Control 2 or HDAVI Control 3 and
an amplifier/receiver supports HDAVI Control, the unit is turned off if the power to the television is turned off,
since “Power off link” (➡ 72) operates.
Playing music
continuously even
after turning off
power to the
The following operations make it possible to keep the power of the unit ON and to play music continuously.
1 While playing music
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Power Off” and press [OK].
television
≥Sound may be discontinued for several seconds when the power to the television is turned off.
≥If the operation mentioned above is executed while audio is output from the television, the sound may not be
output from the amplifier/receiver. It is recommended to set the amplifier/receiver beforehand so that audio will
be output from the amplifier/receiver.
RQT9135
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing music/playlist
Editing music
Album and track operation
[HDD]
After performing step 1–4 (➡ left)
Preparation
Delete all tracks in the HDD.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Delete All Tracks
≥While displaying Music
Menu screen
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
≥When doing “Delete All Tracks”, “Clear My Favourites” or
“Clear Frequently Played” (➡ go to step 3)
All tracks in the selected Artist or
Album are deleted in case of “ Delete
All Tracks” or “Delete Album”.
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
Delete All Tracks
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
≥While displaying “Artists”
screen
Artists
Albums
Delete Album
My Favourites
Playlists
≥While displaying
“Albums” screen
Frequently Played
Random Play
Delete
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
(➡ 71, Entering text)
Edit Album Name
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Enter Artist Name
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select item and press
[OK].
∫When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist, and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
Remove all tracks in “My
Favourites”.Tracks themselves are
not deleted from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Clear” and
press [OK].
Clear My
Favourites
Remove all tracks in “Frequently
Played”.Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Clear” and
press [OK].
Clear Frequently
Played
∫When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To edit the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
Selected track is removed. Track
itself is not deleted from the HDD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
Remove
≥While displaying “My
Favourites” or
“Frequently Played”
screen
3 Press [OPTION].
4 Press [3, 4] to select item and press
[OK].
e.g., while selecting album
Delete Album
(➡ 68)
Add to Playlist
Album and track operation (➡ right)
Edit Album Name
e.g., while selecting artist
Delete All Tracks
Enter Artist Name
Album and track operation (➡ right)
e.g., while selecting track
Delete
Add to Playlist
(➡ 68)
Album and track operation
(➡ right)
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
(➡ 66)
Properties
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9135
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing music/playlist
Register track to Playlist
[HDD]
Editing Playlist
[HDD]
You can register your favourite albums and tracks into 10 preset
playlists.
≥Name of the playlist can be changed.
≥New playlist cannot be added.
≥Up to 999 tracks can be registered to each playlist.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
press [OK].
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
3
Edit the playlist
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
Press [3, 4] to select the playlist and
press [OPTION].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Music Menu
Total Tracks 53
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Edit the track in the playlist
1 Press [3, 4] to select the playlist and
Artists
Albums
press [OK].
My Favourites
Playlists
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[OPTION].
Frequently Played
Random Play
4 Press [3, 4] to select item and press
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
[OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select item and press
e.g., while selecting playlist
[OK].
∫When “Artists” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the artist.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the name of the artist, and press
[OK].
Remove All Tracks
(➡ below)
Edit Playlist Name
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
e.g., while selecting the track in playlist
∫When “Albums” is selected
1 Press [2, 1] to select the initial of the album.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album.
≥To register the track, press [OK], and select the track with
[3, 4].
(➡ below)
Remove
Add to Playlist
(➡ left)
Edit Track Name
Edit Artist Name
Properties
(➡ 67)
3 Press [OPTION].
(➡ 66)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Add to
Playlist” and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
5 Press [3, 4] and select the playlist to
register, and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Playlists
Playlist Name
My Favourites
Playlist operation
After performing step 1–4 (➡ above, Editing Playlist)
Playlist 01
Playlist 02
Playlist 03
Playlist 04
Playlist 05
Playlist 06
Playlist 07
Remove all tracks in the selected
playlist. Tracks themselves are not
deleted from the HDD.
Remove All
Tracks
Playlist 08
Playlist 09
OPTION
Please select playlist to add to.
OK
RETURN
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Selected track is removed. Track itself
is not deleted from the HDD.
Remove
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press [2, 1] to select “Remove”
and press [OK].
(➡ 71, Entering text)
Edit Playlist
Name
RQT9135
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying music to HDD
You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
1
While stopped
Music CD (CD-DA)
Insert a CD or USB memory.
When inserting music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.
[CD] (Music CD)
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
MP3
P O W E R E D B Y
You can copy MP3 files from the CD or USB memory.
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve
CD title information.
When a CD is inserted, the unit will automatically search for and
obtain information about the inserted CD.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained.This unit has an internal
database containing information for approximately 350,000 album
titles.
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
[USB] [CD] (MP3)
The menu is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Play/Copy Music (MP3)” or “MP3” and
press [OK].
≥[CD] It will go to step 2 automatically if it is only MP3 that is
recorded.
If the title of the newly released CD is not in the built-in database, it is
possible to acquire the title automatically by connecting to the
network via the Internet. (➡ 94)
If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect
title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found, it
is displayed as “Unknown Artist”, “Unknown Album”.
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
USB device
Copy AVCHD
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
USB device is inserted.
OK
RETURN
Copying music from a CD or a USB
memory
CD
JPEG
MP3
[CD] [USB]> [HDD]
≥[CD] (Music CD): All tracks in the CD will be recorded.
≥[USB] [CD] (MP3): All tracks in the folder will be recorded.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
Select file type.
OK
RETURN
≥It will be recorded as 1 album to the HDD in 1 recording.
≥Audio quality
[CD] (Music CD): LPCM, [USB] [CD] (MP3): MP3
≥The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 40000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
2 Press the “Blue” button.
0.09
4.30
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD
Music List
March Moon
Do this flower open?
No.
Track Name
Artist
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
Leon I
March Moon
01
02
03
04
05
Playing track
Do this flower open?
Go to there from here
Good by SAKURA
If eastern wind has gone
Leon I
OK
RETURN
Slide show
Retry access
Copy All
to HDD
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[Note]
≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB
memory or SD card.
≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
RQT9135
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
Deleting music
Deleting still pictures
[HDD]
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
1
While stopped
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
press [OK].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
[HDD] [RAM]
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”
[HDD] [RAM]
DELETE Navigator
Music Menu
HDD
MUSIC
VIDEO PICTURE
Total Tracks 53
To switch the display method
1 Press [OPTION].
Artists
Albums
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Album View” or “Pictures by Date”
and press [OK].
My Favourites
Playlists
Frequently Played
DELETE Navigator
Pictures by Date
Time Remaining
20:08 DR
PICTURE
VIDEO
MUSIC
001
002
OPTION
VIDEO
Please select to access music.
PICTURE MUSIC
OK
RETURN
Date:08.09.2006
Total 19
Date:04.02.2007
Total
9
VIDEO
3
Deleting an artist/album (music)
Press OK to display pictures.
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and
press [OK].
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and
press [DELETE ¢].
Page 01/01
OPTION
Select
OK
PICTURE
MUSIC
RETURN
3
Deleting an album/date (still picture)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
Deleting a track
and press [DELETE ¢].
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
which contains the track to delete and
press [OK].
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the track and
press [OK].
Deleting a still picture
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
which contains the still picture to delete
and press [OK].
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
Remove the music
(Only when “My Favourites”, “Playlists”, or “Frequently
Played” are selected)
1Press [3, 4] to select the item and press
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the
[OK].
option menu. (➡ 60, step 2)
2Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[OK].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
3Press [2, 1] to select “Remove” and press
Multiple deleting
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
[OK].
≥Remove is executed. (There is no need to proceed to
step 4)
≥Track itself is not deleted from the HDD.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the
option menu. (➡ 67, step 3)
press [OK].
The item is deleted.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
To return to the previous screen
press [OK].
Press [RETURN].
The item is deleted.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9135
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering text
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
[HDD] [RAM]
character and press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
Characters
64 (44§)
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
Title
Album of still pictures
Album (Music) ([HDD])
Track ([HDD])
36
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
59
e.g., entering the letter “R”
59
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
5
6
J
M
P
K
N
Q
L
O
R
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
Artist ([HDD])
39
3 Press [OK].
7
7
Playlist (Music) [HDD]
59
≥To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢] and press
[OK].
7
Disc ([RAM])
§Title name for timer recording
64
7
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
3 Press [∫] (Set).
Title
Disc
44
40
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
[Note]
To end partway
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1 Show Enter Name screen.
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation (➡ 79). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 34.
Title
Select “Enter Name” in step 4 on page 42.
Enter Name
Disc
_
Chapter 1_
Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 77.
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
9
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
*
/
%
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 3, “Editing still pictures
(JPEG)” on page 60.
i
$
&
Album (Music) ([HDD])
Select “Edit Album Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 67.
Track ([HDD])
Select “Edit Track Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 67.
Artist ([HDD])
Select “Edit Artist Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 67.
Playlist (Music) ([HDD])
Select “Edit Playlist Name” in step 4 of “Editing Playlist” on
page 68.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Enter Name
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
9
0
Top Menu Preview
*
d
g
j
/
%
h
k
i
$
&
@
_
Delete
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
Set
m
n
o
[
]
(
}
\
M
P
T
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
)
-
v
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
^
`
0
OK
0
9
SPACE
RETURN
RQT9135
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control”.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.
“HDAVI Control 3” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This
standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.
≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’ equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation
1
2
3
4
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable (➡ 17) or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (➡ 92).
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➡ 85). (The default setting is “On”.)
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control”
function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”
If this unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA) supporting HDAVI Control 3 via an HDMI cable, then
the setting information on the TV is acquired by this unit when the unit is turned on for the first time. (➡ 19).
Download from the
§1
TV
(When the TV is on)
Easy playback
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to
HDMI input mode and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§2, [1] (PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
(When the TV is off)
Power on link
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§2, [1] (PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD]
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is
automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback
or when the unit set to a timer recording.
Power off link
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when
recording, copying, finalising etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,
the receiver will also turn off.
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operation.
≥The titles are recorded to HDD.
§1
Direct TV Recording
To stop recording
Press [∫]
(➡ 66, Playing music continuously even after turning off power to the television)
Playing music
continuously even after
turning off power to the
§4
television
§1 This function is available with the TV which has “HDAVI Control 3” function.
§2 This button is available only when this unit is on.
§3 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.
§4 This function is available with the TV which has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function.
[Note]
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the instructions of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT9135
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more
convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons.
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.
≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote control other than those listed above.
≥The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
Using the FUNCTION
FUNCTION MENU
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window
MENU window to
using the TV remote control.
Time Remaining
22:30 DR
operate this unit
Playback
≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
Recording
Delete
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV
remote control, and press [OK].
≥This function is available with the
TV which has “HDAVI Control 2”
or “HDAVI Control 3” function.
Copy
To Others
OK
RETURN
About the FUNCTION MENU
window (➡ 76).
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD.
This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be
deleted.
Pause live TV
programme
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
≥This function is available with the
TV which has “HDAVI Control 3”
function.
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.
≥This unit turns on automatically.
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (➡ below) and press [OK].
≥The TV programme resumes.
To stop Pause Live TV
1 Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Refer to “Note” on page 76, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”.
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (➡ below).
Using the OPTION
menu window to
operate this unit
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
(➡ below).
e,g.,
FUNCTION
MENU
FUNCTION MENU window is
displayed (➡ above).
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Aspect
≥This function is available with the
TV which has “HDAVI Control 2”
or “HDAVI Control 3” function.
Aspect
Switch the screen mode (➡ 75).
Top Menu
Menu
Top Menu
[DVD-V]
Top menu is displayed (➡ 22).
Drive Select
Menu [DVD-V]
Menu is displayed.
OK
RETURN
Drive Select
Select the HDD, DVD or SD
drive
[Note]
Rotate RIGHT
(JPEG)
Rotate the still picture (➡ 59).
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top
Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-
Video is copying.
Rotate LEFT
(JPEG)
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Zoom in (JPEG) Enlarge or shrink the still
picture (➡ 59).
Zoom out
(JPEG)
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote
control.
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➡ above).
Using the Control
Panel
The Control Panel is displayed (➡ right).
≥When playing a title, etc.
–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]:
Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.
≥While playing still pictures
–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit
the screen.
Control Panel
Pause
Exit
Search
Search
Play
Stop
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [Í DVD] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (➡ 85).
RQT9135
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions to playback and viewing or listening
Audio attribute
LPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Using on-screen menus
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Common procedures
Number of channels
Language
1 Press [DISPLAY].
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
DAN: Danish
POR: Portuguese
THA: Thai
POL: Polish
CES: Czech
SLK: Slovak
HUN: Hungarian
FIN: Finnish
Disc
CꢀDigital 2/0 ch
1
Soundtrack
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
Play
Off
Subtitle
Picture
L R
Audio channel
Sound
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
¢:
Others
Menu
Item
Setting
VIE: Vietnamese
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
Play menu—Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
Repeat Play
press [1].
Items displayed depends on the contents of the playback.
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥All
≥Playlist
≥Track
≥Title
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
≥Chapter
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
Select “Off” to cancel.
Random (Only when playing music)
While playing, press [3, 4] to select “On”.
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Video [AVCHD]
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
The video recording method appears
Soundtrack§
Mode
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
Select the audio and language (➡ right, Audio attribute,
Language).
Select the picture quality mode during play.
≥Normal:
≥Soft:
Default setting
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
Details are sharper
Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark
scenes. (This does not affect the titles in DR
mode.)
≥Fine:
Subtitle§
[DVD-V] [AVCHD]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ right,
Language).
≥Cinema:
HD optimizer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
It will compensate the mosaic noise in the video and haze
around the characters precisely.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
Progressive§ (➡ 111)
Multi Audio [HDD] (only for titles in DR mode)
Switch in the case of multiple audio.
Angle§ [DVD-V]
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
(➡ 39, Changing audio during play)
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 110, Film and video).
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
the menus (➡ 22) on the disc.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration
to the right, then select “Auto”.
§It will work in following conditions.
–When “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu is “Off” (➡ 85) and
“Component Resolution” in the Setup menu is “576p/480p”
(➡ 85)
–When “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup menu is “Off” (➡ 85) and
playing [DVD-V]
RQT9135
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
Switch the aspect ratio of the screen
When black bars are shown at the top, bottom, left, and right sides of
the screen, you can enlarge the image to fill the screen.
Sound Effects
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [AVCHD]
1 Press [OPTION].
≥Re-master1
≥Re-master2
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Aspect” and
(Discs record at 48 kHz or less)
This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding higher
frequency signals not recorded on the track.
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the item.
≥V.Surround1
≥Normal:
≥V.Surround2
Normal output
(2-channel or over only)
≥Side cut:
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
The black bars on the right and left sides of the 16:9 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
right and left sides of the image are cut off when the black
bar is not displayed.
–Turn V.Surround off if it causes distortion. (Check the
surround function on the connected equipment.)
–V.Surround does not work for bilingual recordings.
≥This function is effective for audio from the HDMI terminal or
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal only when “Digital Audio
Output” is set to “PCM”. (However, in this case, audio is
output as 2ch.)
Dialogue Enhancer
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with Side
cut
Display as frame on
the 4:3 aspect ratio
TV screen§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[AVCHD]
16:9 image with
black bars on the
right and left
(3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Status messages
Press [STATUS ].
Enlarged display
with black bar
Displayed with black
bars on right and left
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
The display changes each time you press the button.
erased with Side
cut
§
Only when “TV Aspect” (➡ 84) is set to “Letterbox”.
≥Zoom:
The black bars on the top and bottom sides of the 4:3 image
disappear and the image is enlarged. Please note that the
top and bottom sides of the image are cut off when the black
bar is not displayed.
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB
memory
HDD
REC1
PLAY
The remaining time appears while stopped.
Recording or play status
002 ABC TV
Channel/The name of the station
4:3 image with
black bars at the
top and bottom
Displayed as frame
on the 16:9 aspect
ratio TV screen
Enlarged display
with black bar
erased with
Zoom
Recording in background/copy progress
indicator
022 ABC REC2
Audio LR
eng
Selected audio type
4 Press [OK].
[Note]
≥The screen mode is switched to “Normal” in the following
situations:
–when you change channel
–when you start or end the playback of a title
–when the unit is turned off or on.
≥[DVD-V] “Side cut” does not have any effect.
≥When “TV Aspect” (➡ 84) is set to “Pan & Scan” or “Letterbox”, the
“Zoom” effect is disabled.
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
Date and time
18:53:50 11.11.2008
Title number and
Remain
HDD 45:53 DR
DVD 8:27 SP
T2 0:10.10 DR
T2 0:00.10 DR
elapsed time
T1 0:05.14 XP
1
during recording/
Recording mode
2
0:35.32
Total time
Current position
To return to the previous screen
≥When using Pause Live TV
Press [RETURN].
Current time
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
18:53:50 11.11.2008
Live 18:53.50
View 18:40.12
The time when the picture currently displayed on the
television was broadcasted
All DVB Services
Select FAV List
Software update
10:30
1 TEN HD
Corontation street
9:00 - 11:00
Now
RQT9135
STTL
Bad Signal
Rating:PG
TEXT
Digital channel information (➡ 21)
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUNCTION MENU window/Pause Live TV
FUNCTION MENU window
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
Preparation
FUNCTION MENU
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
Time Remaining
22:30 DR
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
1 Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.
To Others
OK
2 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
RETURN
3
When you want to pause the TV programme
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
Press [;].
press [OK].
≥If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following
screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
[OK].
HDD
PAUSE
Pause Live TV
FUNCTION MENU
Time Remaining
22:30 DR
Playback
Timer Recording
Advanced Copy
Flexible Rec
Recording
Delete
DV Auto Rec
Copy
Setup
4
When you want to resume
To Others
OK
RETURN
Press [1] (PLAY).
≥The programme is saved on the HDD in DR recording mode.
≥Programmes can be saved temporary up to 8 hours on the
HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)
≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
screen.
Playback
You can select and play recorded
programmes (➡ 22), change the Play
Mode (JPEG, MP3), etc.
Operation during Pause Live TV
Press [6, 5].
Search
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Recording
You can easily find programmes you want
to watch and set them for timer recording
(➡ 24).
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [;].
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.
Pause
Delete
You can delete items using DELETE
Navigator (➡ 26, 70).
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
≥Press again to return to the normal speed.
Quick View
Copy
You can copy recorded titles using COPY
Navigator (➡ 27).
While paused, press [6] or
Slow-
motion
[5].
Timer Recording
Advanced Copy
Copy New Pictures
Playlists
You can start programming timer
recording (➡ 34).
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
You can make a copy list and then copy
(➡ 50).
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
Stop Pause
Live TV
You can copy the new still pictures on an
SD card (➡ 62).
[Note]
Playlists recorded on other equipment can
be played back. (➡ 41)
≥Temporary save is stopped in following cases.
–When save time exceeds 8 hours
–When there is no HDD free space
Flexible Rec
The unit sets the best possible picture
quality that fits the recording within the
remaining disc space (➡ 32).
–When 2 programmes are recorded simultaneously
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work
–The clock is not set.
DV Auto Rec
DV automatic recording function (➡ 55)
–While 2 programmes simultaneous recording
–While watching a programme being recorded
–When AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4, or DV is selected
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 10 minutes while
the screen is being displayed the screen saver is displayed [only
when the “Screen Saver” in Setup menu is set to “On” (➡ 84).]. To
return to the previous screen, press [RETURN].
Recording via AV3
input
You can record to disc from the AV3 input
terminals. (➡ 55)
Copy AVCHD
You can copy the HD video (AVCHD
format) on a disc or SD card (➡ 56).
Setup
You can change the unit’s settings using
Setup menu (➡ 80).
DVD Management
Card Management
You can manage the discs and cards
through formatting, finalising and other
operations (➡ 77).
USB device
This unit displays the menu to help you
start USB operations (➡ 58).
≥“USB device” appears when a
compatible USB device is connected.
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
RQT9135
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
Setting the protection
[RAM]
Common procedures
Preparation
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD or SD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Protection” and press [OK].
and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
FUNCTION MENU
press [OK].
DVD-RAM
Time Remaining
4:00 EP
DVD Management
Playback
Timer Recording
Files
1
Titles 11
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used 0 : 22
DVD-RAM
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Recording
Delete
DV Auto Rec
Disc Name
Recording via AV3 input
Setup
Copy
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
On
To Others
OK
DVD Management
RETURN
OK
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DVD
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
Management” or “Card Management”
and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles 11
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used 0 : 22
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Off
Cartridge-protection
OK
RETURN
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
PROTECT
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
(➡ 71, Entering text)
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Files
1
Titles
1
0
My favorite
01
01/02
Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used
02
Chapter
1
Chapter
2
My favorite
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9135
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card management
Deleting all titles—Delete all titles
[RAM]
Enabling the unit’s recording
function—Format
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
[SD]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 77, Setting the protection).
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 11, 77, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 77, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
[Note]
titles” and press [OK].
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 77, Common procedures)
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select, “Format Disc”
A message appears when finished.
or “Format Card” and press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
press [OK].
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
[Note]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Still picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
4 Press [OK].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9135
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After finalising
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 78) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-
Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).
Before
finalising
After
finalising
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Recording/Editing/Entering name
Play on other players
≤
–
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 77, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
Top Menu List
–
≤
≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
1
2
3
Display after finalising
01
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
[+RW]
Title Name
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 43,
Change Thumbnail)
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first—Auto-Play Select
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left)
before creating top menu.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 77, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [OK].
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 77, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
“Title 1” and press [OK].
press [OK].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.
4 Press [OK].
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise
[Note]
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalising the disc.
Preparation
To return to the previous screen
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Press [RETURN].
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 77, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
4 Press [OK].
[Note]
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
RQT9135
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Tuning
∫ Edit Favourites
You can create four groups of channels for making viewing and
recording easier. Editing these groups does not affect the channel
setting itself.
Common procedures
1
While stopped
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the groups
during timer recording standby.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press the “Blue” button to select the group.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Edit Favourites
and press [OK].
All DVB Services
2 ABC
Fav List1
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
20 ABC HDTV
press [OK].
Setup
Tuning
HDD / Disc
Picture
Select programme
Store
RETURN
Add
Add all
Select FAV List
Sound
Display
To add channels to a group
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All DVB Services”
column and press the “Green” button.
Connection
Network Settings
Others
OK
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
≥Press the “Yellow” button to add all the available channels to the
group. (This function is available only when no channels have
been added to the group.)
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
2 Press [OK] to save the group.
press [OK].
To change the order of channels of a group
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Fav List” column to
move and press the “Green” button.
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press
the “Green” button.
≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the group.
option and press [OK].
≥Follow the instruction on the screen if the operation method
is different.
To delete channels on a group
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Fav List” column and
press the “Yellow” button.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
group.
3 Press [OK] to save the group.
Deleting a channel from a group does not affect the channel
itself. You can still select the channel from the “All DVB Services”
group.
To change the name of a group in the “Fav List” column
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press the “Red” button.
≥User input screen appear.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a character and press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To delete a character
Press the “Blue” button.
4 Press the “Red” button.
§ When the station name of the “All DVB Services” column is
highlighted
∫ Auto-Setup
Download from TV
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 18) fails for some
reason.
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a VIERA
Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with an HDMI cable.
When the confirmation screen appears
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until Region
Selection screen appears. (➡ 18)
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
RQT9135
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ DVB Manual Tuning
∫ New Service Message
You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto-Setup could not
complete successfully.
When a new DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you press
[OK], Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings and all created
categories are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Manual Tuning” and press [OK].
DVB Manual Tuning
Physical Channel
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
[CH6]
498.0
1 Press [3, 4] to select “New Service Message”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Automatic” or “Off”.
MHz
10
10
0
0
Prog. RF Ch
Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
[Automatic]
[Off]
The service messages are not shown.
Select channel
Start tuning
Select offset
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.
3 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.
≥The frequency rises and falls in steps of 0.125 MHz.
≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays.
[Refer to “DVB Signal Display” (➡ below) for signal quality and
signal strength.]
4 Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
5 Press [EXIT] and press [W X CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
∫ Add New Service
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to
receive.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Add New Service” and press [OK].
The unit starts searching for newly available terrestrial digital
channels. This takes about 3 minutes.
Add New Service
Please wait!
6
69
Prog. RF Ch
Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
This will take about 3 mins.
RETURN
A message is displayed when the search is finished.
“No services found” is displayed when no new services can be
found.
2 Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
∫ DVB Signal Display
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
When “DVB Signal Display” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1
2
3
Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “TV”.
Display the Setup menu again (➡ 80).
Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Signal Display” and press [OK].
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
DVB Signal Display
Service Name
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
[CH48] 2 ABC TV Sydney
0
5
10
Prog. +
Prog. –
RETURN
Signal Quality
Below 2 (display red):
The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the
pictures and sound.
2–5 (display orange):
The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the
pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.
Over 5 (display green):
Optimum picture and sound quality.
Signal Strength
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
≥When the signal is weak:
–adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
–adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu (➡ above).
–check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
RQT9135
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
HDD/Disc
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Settings for Recording
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Settings for DVD-Video Playback
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(➡ 30, Recording modes and approximate recording times).
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[6 hours]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
Soundtrack
[English]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[8 hours]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
≥The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when
using “8 hours”.
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording.
It is valid when recording in following.
≥When recording to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format)
Subtitle
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on that disc.
≥When the “Rec for High Speed Copy” is enabled (➡ below)
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
[16:9]
[4:3]
Menu
[English]
≥When recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded in the
original aspect ratio.
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
DVD-Video Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with
the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.
Do not forget your password.
Rec for High Speed Copy
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using
high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted
(➡ below).
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[8 No Limit]
[1 to 7]
All DVD-Video can be played.
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is valid for the following cases:
–Recording TV programmes in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes
–Recording from an external equipment (including DV
equipment)
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Level]
[Change Password]
[Temporary Unlock]
–Copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
[On]
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded
titles.
§ [Other ¢¢¢¢]
Enter a code (➡ 97) with the numbered buttons.
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the
default language is played. There are discs where you can only
switch the language from the menu screen (➡ 22).
–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio
set in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ above).
–Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 83).
–You are no longer able to switch the audio
when watching a programme on an input
channel on the TV connected to this unit.
[DVD-V]
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you
make here.
[Off]
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible discs).
[Maximum]
[Normal (Silent)]
The noise generated by this unit is less
than when “Maximum” is selected,
however the time required for copying will
double (approximately).
HDD Management
≥Press and hold [OK] to show the following settings.
Delete all titles
Delete all titles.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
Format HDD
Format of the HDD is performed.
RQT9135
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolby Digital§
Picture
Select to output Dolby Digital as bitstream or PCM.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
[Bitstream]
Select “Bitstream” when the connected equipment
can decode the respective audio format.
Still Mode
[PCM]
Select “PCM” when the connected equipment
cannot decode the respective audio format.
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (➡ 110,
Frames and fields).
[Automatic]
Refer to the operating instructions for connected
devices to verify whether or not they can decode
each of the audio formats.
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
[Frame]
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be
seen clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The
picture is clearer and finer.)
DTS§
Select to output DTS Digital surround as bitstream or PCM.
[Bitstream]
Select “Bitstream” when the connected equipment
can decode the respective audio format.
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
[PCM]
Select “PCM” when the connected equipment
cannot decode the respective audio format.
≥It is not valid for titles in DR mode or AVCHD videos.
[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
Refer to the operating instructions for connected
devices to verify whether or not they can decode
each of the audio formats.
MPEG§
Select to output MPEG as bitstream or PCM.
[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
[Bitstream]
Select “Bitstream” when the connected equipment
can decode the respective audio format.
NTSC Video Output
Select how the NTSC image is output.
[PCM]
Select “PCM” when the connected equipment
cannot decode the respective audio format.
[NTSC]
[PAL60] Convert and output as PAL60.
Select this when connected to the PAL format TV.
Output as NTSC.
Refer to the operating instructions for connected
devices to verify whether or not they can decode
each of the audio formats.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
Sound
[Dolby Digital] (➡ 110)
[LPCM] (➡ 110)
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ left).
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V]
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
[On]
[Off]
Bilingual Audio Selection
Audio Mode for DV Input
(Only when recording from DV input)
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
input terminal (➡ 54).
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
≥Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+RW.
[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).
≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is enabled. (➡ 82)
≥Recording sound in LPCM (➡ right, “Audio Mode for XP
Recording”).
[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
[M 1]
[M 2]
≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ left).
≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ right).
Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast
Selects the initial setting for Audio tracks,
If programme has both Dolby Digital and MPEG audio tracks,
priority is given to what you select.
Only the selected audio is recorded when recorded or copied in
XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR recording mode.
(It is recorded in accordance with the setting of the “Multi Audio” in
Disc menu only when it is copied with “Copy Title Playing”.)
Digital Audio Output
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
[Dolby Digital]
A method of coding digital signals developed by
Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2ch)
audio, these signals can also be multi-channel
audio.
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
It will be converted to 48 kHz regardless of the setting in
following cases.
≥The signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz.
≥The disc has copy protection.
[MPEG]
An audio compression method that compresses
audio to small size without any considerable
loss of audio quality.
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
§ [Note]
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
≥If the unit is connected with the HDMI AV OUT terminal, the
specifications of the connected equipment take preference over
this unit and audio selected in these items may not be output
(e.g., when a television is connected, the HDMI audio output of
this unit is limited to down-mixed 2ch.)
≥Audio will be output as 2 ch if it is set to “PCM”. Set to “Bitstream”
if you would like to output as surround audio, such as 5.1 ch.
RQT9135
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Display
Connection
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (➡ 21) disappears automatically.
TV Aspect
The length of time the control panel (➡ 73) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
Set to match the type of television connected.
[16:9]
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)
[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed
for 16:9 picture.
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[10 sec.]
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
[Letterbox]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television. 16:9 picture is shown in
the letterbox style.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 86) to “On”.
[Bright]
[Dim]
Aspect for 4:3 Video
[Automatic]
The display turns dark during play and disappears when
the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily if a button
is pressed. While using this mode, the standby power
consumption can be reduced.
To play a 4:3 title, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen
television.
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
Screen Saver
This is to prevent burn-in on the screen.
≥When this is set to “On”, the masked-off area on the screen
becomes grey.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with
side panels.
[Only when connecting with an HDMI cable or a component
video cable and “HDMI Video Format” (➡ 85) is set to any other
mode than “576p/480p”, or “Component Resolution” (➡ 85) is
set to “720p” or “1080i”]
TV System
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles
on the HDD.
[On]
If there is no operation for 10 minutes or more, the
displayed screen switches to the other states
automatically.
[PAL]
≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television.
–When the Direct Navigator, TV Guide, Timer
recording list, COPY Navigator, DELETE
Navigator or FUNCTIONS menu is displayed,
the display on the screen is not displayed.
–When Music is played, the display returns to the
screen saver mode. (Playback continues.)
–When still pictures are shown (except for
slideshows), the display returns to the Direct
Navigator screen.
≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input
from other equipment.
≥Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
≥Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on
the HDD.
–The display returns to the screen saver mode
when it is paused by the Pause Live TV. (Pause
status will continue.)
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
[Off]
≥
If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be used.
Teletext
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.
You will be able to playback by changing the “TV System”
settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording,
change back the settings before the recording starts.
Select the Teletext display mode. (➡ 21)
[TOP]
[List]
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
∫ Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the
type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
TV type
Disc/Titles recorded on HDD
Yes/No
Multi-system
TV
PAL
NTSC
PAL
≤
≤
PAL TV
≤
NTSC
PAL
≤
§1 (PAL60)
NTSC TV
–
§2
NTSC
≤
§1 Select “PAL60” for “NTSC Video Output” in the Setup menu
(➡ 83). If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60
signals the picture will not be shown correctly.
§2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System”.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC).
RQT9135
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI Connection
AV1 Output
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video” or “S Video” for component output (progressive
output).
HDMI Video Mode
Select “On” when video is output from HDMI AV OUT terminal.
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1” or “RGB 2”.
[On]
[Video]
[Off] When the equipment such as amplifiers is connected
using HDMI cable, and TV is connected to the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal (setup before
connecting to the amplifiers.)
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
[S Video]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.
HDMI Video Format
[RGB 1]
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must
also be 1080p compatible.
[RGB 2]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
[576p/480p]
[720p]
All images other than 720p will be output as
1080i.
AV2 Input
Set according to the output signal of the connected equipment.
[1080i]
[Video]
[1080p]
When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend
using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less
than 5.0 meters to prevent video distortion etc.
[S Video]
Network Settings
[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p or 576p/480p).
IP Address/DNS Settings (➡ 87)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥Press the [∫] and [1] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds when
the image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be set to
“576p/480p”.
Connection Test
[--]
HDMI Audio Output
[On]
IP Address Auto-assignment
[On]
[Off]
[Off]
When connected to TV with HDMI cable,
and connected to amplifiers not compatible
to HDMI with a DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
terminal
IP Address
[---.---.---.---]
Subnet Mask
[---.---.---.---]
VIERA Link
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
Gateway Address
[On]
[---.---.---.---]
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
Component Resolution
This sets the video output resolution when using the component
video terminal.
[On]
[Off]
Primary DNS
[576i/480i] [576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
[---.---.---.---]
≥If it is set to “720p”, images other than “720p” will be output as
“1080i”.
≥Press the [∫] and [1] (PLAY) for more than 5 seconds when
the image is disturbed by changing the setting. It will be set to
“576i/480i”.
Secondary DNS
[---.---.---.---]
Connection Speed Auto-configure
[On]
[Off]
Connection Speed Setting
This is enabled only when “Connection Speed Auto-configure” is
turned “Off”.
[10BASE half duplex]
[100BASE half duplex]
[10BASE full duplex]
[100BASE full duplex]
Proxy Server Settings (➡ 88)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Initialize
Set the setting of the “Proxy Server Settings” back.
Proxy Address
(The initial setting blank.)
Proxy Port Number
(The initial setting is “0”.)
RQT9135
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Power Save
Others
[On]
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to
standby (➡ 109).
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Off Timer
[Off]
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
(If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
[2 hours]
[4 hours]
[6 hours]
[Off]
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
– “FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 84).
– The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
Remote Control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic
products close together.
Quick Start
[DVD 1]
[DVD 2]
[DVD 3]
Speed of startup from power off is increased.
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, COMPONENT
VIDEO, VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals)
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or
“DVD 3”) and press [OK].
[On]
[Off]
Standby power consumption is less than when this is set to
“On”.
To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
(If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to “Off”.)
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:
– A disc other than DVD-RAM is inserted.
– You want to make other operations.
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
– The clock has not been set.
≥Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may
take time to display the screen.
The unit’s remote control code
System Update (➡ 90)
In order to update this unit’s software and to support system
changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs
software updates.
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 2).
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Software Update in Standby
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the
main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 2).
[On]
When you set this unit to standby mode, software
updates are downloaded automatically.
[Off]
Clock
Software Licence
≥Press [OK] to show the following setting.
Information about the software licence is displayed.
Auto Clock Setting
Initialize
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
But, if the time is not set correctly, set it to “Off” and perform the
“Manual Setting”. (➡ below)
Shipping Condition
All the settings except for the ratings level and ratings password
return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are
also cancelled.
[On]
[Off]
Region Selection
[Yes]
[No]
Select the region where you live to adjust the standard time.
≥The time contained in the broadcast signal is UTC (Universal
time, coordinated).
Default Settings
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, disc
language settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote
control code, network settings return to the factory presets.
[NSW/ACT]
[Victoria]
[Queensland]
[South Australia]
[Western Australia]
[Northern Territory] [Tasmania]
[Yes]
[No]
Daylight Saving Time
Select time offset from the standard time for Summer Time.
≥Normally select “Auto”.
≥If there is a gap between displayed time and actual time, set
this function.
[Auto]
[0 hour]
[+1/2 hour]
[+1 hour]
Manual Setting
≥Press [OK] to show the following setting.
Clock
Time
15
Date
1
:
45
:
39
.
8
.
2008
Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
2 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
3 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
RQT9135
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ Setting the DNS-IP
Network Settings
These settings are used if you will connect this unit to a network.
The connection to the Internet may take time or the internet may not
be connected depending on the connection environment.
It is recommended that you use a broadband connection.
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
any changes.
When setting an assigned DNS server from your internet service
provider, perform the following settings.
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
6 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address Auto-
assignment” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Primary DNS” or
“Secondary DNS”and press [OK].
Preparation
Connect to the network. (➡ 94)
∫ Testing the connection
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
Always test the connection when a LAN cable is connected or when
new “IP Address/DNS Settings” have been made.
press [OK].
≥Follow the instructions given by your internet service provider
and enter the numbers.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Network Settings” and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address/DNS
Settings” and press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Test” and
press [OK].
If the number is unknown, then check the number of other
devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN
cable and assign the same number.
≥If a wrong number is entered, then press [DELETE ¢].
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
[Note]
≥The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
∫ Setting the connection speed
When the connection test results in “Failed” after the IP and DNS-IP
addresses are assigned, perform the following settings.
IP Address / DNS Settings
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
ConnectionTest
䋭䋭
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Speed Auto-
configure” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection Speed
Setting” and press [2, 1] to select a
IP Address Auto-assignment
IP Address
On
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
On
Subnet Mask
connection speed.
Gateway Address
DNS-IP Auto-assignment
≥Select a connection speed in accordance with the environment
of the network connected.
Primary DNS
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
≥When the settings are changed, the network connection may be
disabled depending on the device.
Secondary DNS
㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄㪄㪅㩷㪄㪄㪄
Connection Speed Auto-configure
Connection Speed Setting
On
䋭䋭
MAC Address: 00-0b-97-e6-7a-ae
OK
RETURN
“Testing”: The test is in progress.
“OK”:
The connection is completed.
“Failed”: Please check the connection and settings.
∫ Setting the IP address
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
any changes.
Set the IP address only when the router has no DHCP server
functions or when the router’s DHCP server function is disabled.
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ above)
6 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address Auto-
assignment” and press [2, 1] to select “Off”.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “IP Address”, “Subnet
Mask” or “Gateway Address” and press [OK].
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
≥After checking the specifications for your broadband router,
enter each number.
If the number is unknown, then check the number of other
devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN
cable. Assign a different number from those of other devices for
the “IP Address” and the same number for others.
≥If a wrong number is entered, then press [DELETE ¢].
IP Address
Please input IP Address and press “OK”.
The IP address will be cleared by pressing
“OK” when there is no number input.
192
0
1
.
.
.
-
9
Number
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
RQT9135
[Note]
87
≥The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
∫ Setting the proxy server
In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making
any changes.
Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet provider.
≥Set the proxy server only after the connection test is completed
properly.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Network Settings” and
press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Server Settings”
and press [OK].
Proxy Server Settings
Initialize
Proxy Address
Proxy Port Number
0
OK
RETURN
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Address” and
press [OK].
(➡ 71, Entering text)
After the input of “Proxy Address” is completed
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Proxy Port Number” and
press [OK].
8 Enter numbers with the numbered buttons and
press [OK].
Proxy Port Number
Please input HTTP Proxy Server Port Number
and press “OK”.The number will be set to “0”
by pressing “OK” when there is no number
input.
1
0
-
9
Number
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To set back to default setting
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ above)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Initialize” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
RQT9135
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Settings
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
DVD
TV
[Note]
Volume
VOL
CH
DRIVE
Turn TV on/off
Input select
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
SELECT
AV
Channel
Select
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
4 5 6
Child Lock
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
1 Point the remote control at the
Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the
unit’s display.
television
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
01:
[0] ➡ [1]
10:
[1] ➡ [0]
Manufacturer and Code No.
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
Brand
Panasonic
AIWA
Code
01/02/03/04
35
Brand
Code
05/28
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
05/19/20/47
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”
disappears.
AKAI
27/30
24
36
33
BEJING
BEKO
33
NEC
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX
74
BENQ
58/59
NOKIA
25/26/27/
60/61
BP
09
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
10
BRANDT
BUSH
10/15
05
45
ONWA
30/39/70
05
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
66
ORION
69
PEONY
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
05
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
64/65
05
05
37/38
52
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
05
10/34
61
05
RADIOLA
SABA
05
21
10
53
SALORA
SAMSUNG
26
63/67
32/42/43/
65/68
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
05/50/51
SANSUI
SANYO
05
05
36
09
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
SCHNEIDER
SEG
05/69/75/
76/77/78
HIKONA
HITACHI
52
SELECO
05/25
18
05/22/23/40/ SHARP
41
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
05
30
25
49
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
09
05
08
JINGXING
TCL
31/33/66/
67/69
JVC
17/30/39/70
TELEFUNKEN
10/11/12/
13/14
KDS
52
TEVION
52
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
45
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
52
62
10/15/44
16/57
05
05/50/51
07/46
LOEWE
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
RQT9135
MAG
52
YAMAHA
18/41
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Update
Software of this unit can be updated automatically by following
method.
≥From broadcasts
≥From Internet [network connection and setting is required. (➡ 94)]
Update of the software is done when it is in standby mode.
Once the new software is found, it will start the download of the
software, and then the upload.
Download of the software will start automatically when the power of
this unit is turned off or when it is 3 a.m.
≥The time it takes to update depends on the connection.
–For Broadcast: About 2 to 4 hours
–For Internet: About 1 hour
(It may take longer than specified above to download because
the download time differs depending on the network environment.
It is recommended to be used in a broadband environment.)
If you do not want to perform the software update during the standby
mode, set the “Software Update in Standby” in the Setup menu to
“Off”. (➡ 86)
∫ If a software update is available, a notification is
displayed.
For broadcast
All DVB Services
10:30
1 TEN HD
Corontation street
Select FAV List
Software update
9:00 - 11:00
Now
STTL
Bad Signal
Rating:PG
TEXT
Software update
≥Following screen is displayed when “Red” button is pressed.
For Internet
New software version has been found.
The software will be updated automatically
after the unit is switched to standby.
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead.
≥Update of the software will start when the power is turned off.
∫ The unit’s display during the update
≥“SW-DL” : Software is downloading.
Download will stop when the power is turned on, or
the timer recording starts.
≥“START”§ : Update of the software will start once the download
is completed.
≥“UPD /”§ : Software is updating.
≥“FINISH” : Updated of the software has completed.
§
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress
may damage the unit.
[Note]
≥If the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the
start of the download, the download will not be executed.
–For broadcast: Within 4 hours
–For Internet: Within 1 hour
≥If downloading on this unit fails or this unit is not connected to the
Internet, then you can download the latest software from the
following website and burn it to a CD-R to update the software.
http://panasonic.net/support/
RQT9135
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
§
Leave “Yellow” unconnected.
Connecting a stereo amplifier
Connecting a television with S VIDEO
terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
Amplifier’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R
L
Television’s rear panel
Red White
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
R
L
IN
IN
Red White
Audio cable
S Video
cable
Red PWR hiPtBe
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
AV1
(
)
TV
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
V2 EXT
PR
Y
PB
COMNENT
VIDEO OUT
R
IN
This unit’s rear panel
Red White
AV1
(
TV
)
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting an amplifier with a digital
input terminal
[Required]setting]
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 83)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable or coaxial cable and connected to a television with an
HDMI cable, you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the
disc by setting “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(➡ 85). In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
Television’s rear panel
COMPONENT
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
R
L
R
P
B
P
Y
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
Red White
∫ With OPTICAL
Component
video cable
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
Amplifier’s rear panel
OPTICAL IN
PR
Y
PB
COMPOONENT
VIDEO OUT
RF
Insert fully, with
this side facing
up.
IN
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
N
AV1
(
)
TV
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
Red White
RF
OUT
PR
PB
E-T/
E-TX
AUDI
VIO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
AV1
This unit’s rear
panel
(
)
TV
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
This unit’s rear panel
R-AUDIO-L
VID
(
)
AV2 EXT
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 111) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
∫ With COAXIAL
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Amplifier’s rear panel
COAXIAL IN
[Required]setting]
“Component Resolution” setting in the Setup menu (➡ 85)
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned
about it (➡ 74). This is the same for multi system televisions using
PAL mode.
Coaxial cable
PR
PB
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
CRT
AV1
(
)
TV
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
This unit’s rear panel
R-AUDIO-L
VID
(
)
AV2 EXT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DO NOT
Progressive output
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
This unit
RQT9135
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [➡ 72, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
[Required]setting]
≥Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio
Receiver’s rear
panel
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI cable
LAN
Output” to “On” (➡ 85).
(The default setting is “On”.)
PR
Y
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
RF
IN
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
AV1
HDMI AV OUT
(
TV
)
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
RF
OUT
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OUT
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 110) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9135
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR
Television’s rear panel
To the aerial
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yellow
AC mains lead
Other connections
(➡ 17, 91)
(included)
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
1
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
5
6
Aerial
cable
P
Y
P
ENT
RF
IN
Red White YellowUT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
LAN
AV1
(
)
TV
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
RF
OUT
AC IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OUT
(
)
AV2 EXT
Red White Yellow
This unit’s rear panel
RF coaxial
cable
Cooling fan
Audio/Video cable
3
4
2
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
Red White Yellow
VCR’s
rear panel
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
Connecting a Digital television and VCR
To the aerial
Aerial
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
cable
Splitter
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yellow
3
Aerial cable
Other connections
(➡ 17, 91)
AC mains lead
(included)
5
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
1
6
Audio/Video cable
(included)
PR
Y
PB
ENT
RF
IN
UT
Red White Yellow
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
LAN
AV1
(
)
TV
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
RF
OUT
AC IN
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L
S VIDEO
Red WhiteVYIDEeO llow
AV OUT
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Cooling fan
Audio/Video cable
4
2
RF coaxial cable
(included)
Red White Yellow
VCR’s
rear panel
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
Connect the unit directly to the television
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or
video cassette recorder to the television, video
signal will be affected by copyright protection
systems and the picture may not be shown
correctly.
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin
DO NOT
Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with
Television
a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB output on
this unit.
[Required]setting]
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 85)
VCR
When connecting to a television with a built-in
VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television
side if there are both television and VCR input
terminals.
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin
Scart cable.
This unit
RQT9135
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (➡ 85)
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Network connection
Following function will be available when this unit is connected to the network.
≥This document is assuming that you already have a broadband connection.
≥This connection is not necessary if following functions are not to be used.
Automatically acquire the
title of the CD
Automatically acquire the title of the CD or the information about the artist. (➡ 69)
Update the software of this
unit
Automatically update the software of this unit. (➡ 90)
≥Update of the software can be done from the broadcast too.
Internet
This unit’s rear panel
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
RF
IN
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OPTICAL
LAN
AV1
(
)
TV
AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
RF
OUT
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
AV OUT
(
)
AV2 EXT
Straight LAN cable
Hub or broadband router
≥When your communication equipment (modem), etc. has no
broadband router functions: Connect a broadband router.
When your communication equipment (modem), etc. has
broadband router functions but there are no vacant ports:
Connect a hub.
Telecommunications
equipment (modem, etc)
≥Use a router that supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.
≥Make the necessary settings in “Network Settings” after connecting. (➡ 87)
[Note]
≥Refer to the operating instructions for the connected device.
≥It may not work properly depending on the equipment or environment used.
≥Depending on the contract with the provider, you may not be able to connect multiple numbers of terminals such as this unit or computers, or an
additional fee might be required.
≥Use only shielded LAN cables when connecting to peripheral devices.
RQT9135
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operations that can be performed simultaneously
Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Playback of HDD
Playback of discs
Playback of still
pictures
Playback of music
recorded on HDD
≤
≤
≤
–
–
≤
≤
While recording to HDD in DR mode
§
While recording to HDD in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR
modes
≤
≤
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
≤
–
While timer recording to disc
While recording from DV input
While copying using “Copy”
–
–
–
–
While copying in normal speed mode
While copying in high speed mode
(With finalising)
–
–
While copying in high speed mode
(Without finalising)
≤
–
–
–
§[AVCHD] It cannot playback.
≥Simultaneous operation is not possible while executing the “DV Auto Rec” or “Recording via AV3 input”.
Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation
Starting of timer recording possible during the following
operations
Starting of timer recording not possible during the following
operations
≥Recording the title§1
≥Copying a title in normal speed mode
≥Copying a title in high speed mode (with finalising)
≥Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
≥Editing still pictures or music
≥Copying still pictures
≥Playing the title§2
≥Editing the title
≥Copying a title in high speed mode (without finalising)
– Only 1 programme can be recorded
≥Executing “DV Auto Rec”§3
≥Executing “Recording via AV3 input”§3
≥Executing Pause Live TV§1
≥Copying music
≥Formatting
≥Finalising
§1 Executing operation will terminate when 2 programme
simultaneous recording cannot be performed.
§2 Playback of disc will terminate when the timer recording to disc is
started while playing back from the disc.
§3 Executing operation will be terminated.
RQT9135
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
Page
—
Which aerial is suitable for receiving
digital terrestrial broadcasts?
≥You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the area where you live, a new
aerial may be necessary. Consult your local TV aerial installer.
Can this unit receive or record High
Definition (HD) broadcasts?
≥Yes, this unit can receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts. Record in DR
recording mode.
—
What do I need to play multi channel
surround sound?
≥Connect the appropriate amplifier/receiver to the HDMI AV OUT terminal, the DIGITAL
91, 92
91, 92
—
AUDIO OUT terminal (OPTICAL, COAXIAL).
Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.
My television has S VIDEO IN terminal, ≥The different levels of picture quality input are listed below in order from highest to lowest.
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals and
HDMI IN terminal. Which should I
connect with?
HDMI IN )COMPONENT VIDEO IN )S VIDEO IN )VIDEO IN. However, it will take
longer for the picture output to start up when this unit is connected with the HDMI IN
terminal.
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video bought in another ≥Playback of the following discs is not possible.
Cover
—
–DVD-Video discs that do not include region “4” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
country?
Can DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?
≥The region management information for DVD-Video indicates that the disc conforms to
industry standards. You cannot play discs that do not conform to industry standards or do
not have a region number.
Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.
≥Refer to “HDD and disc information”.
6–10
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette, DVD?
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes, DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording is
—
8–9
48
usually not possible.
Can the disc recorded with this unit play ≥Refer to “Play on other players” in “HDD and disc information”.
on other equipment?
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
≥Yes, you can. (But you may not high speed copy depending on the disc to copy or the
title.)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card, ≥It can be copied to the disc.
—
or USB memory after copying HD video
(AVCHD format) to the HDD?
–It will be copied with SD quality. (It cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)
≥It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.
RQT9135
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide
Page
34
Is it possible to programme a recording, ≥You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording
with a start and end time that are
different from the TV Guide system?
menu.
Can I receive TV Guide system data via ≥No, only via the built-in tuner.
a connected satellite receiver or a Set
Top Box?
—
How can I cancel a TIMER
programming?
≥Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then press [DELETE ¢].
36
What happens when I unplug the unit
from the household mains socket?
≥The TV Guide data will not be updated.
—
—
≥If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for a longer period of time,
the TV Guide data will be lost.
≥Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.
—
USB
What can or cannot be done using the
USB port on this unit?
≥You can play MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB memory.
≥You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the HDD.
≥You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD.
58, 64
62
69
≥You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥You can connect a video equipment and copy HD Video to the HDD.
≥Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.
≥Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be formatted on this
unit.
57
56
—
—
≥Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
11
Music
What will happen if I try to record the
same CD multiple times?
≥New album will be made following the existing album.
—
—
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD ≥No, you cannot.
to the disc or USB memory?
Regarding Frequently asked questions for copying (➡ 48)
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Basque:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
RQT9135
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
Page
On the television
Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.
—
—
31
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded.
Cannot playback.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
84
TV system is different from the
setting.
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
Cannot record to the disc.
Cannot format.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
15
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.
109
15
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
26, 43,
78
Cannot record. Exceeds maximum
number limit of titles allowed.
≥Use a new disc.
—
—
No Disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.
111
15
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
109
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
26, 43,
78
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
51, 63
The disc is not recordable.
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert an unfinalised disc.
≥You inserted an unformatted disc.
—
78
This disc is not formatted properly.
$ This operation cannot be
performed now.
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
—
When removing a recorded disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc for play on other equipment.
Finalise
Finalise the disc to enable playing on other
DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising.This may take up to min.
Finalise the disc ?
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other players
without finalising.
∫ To finalise the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a disc name, select “Top Menu” (➡ 79), “Auto-Play Select” (➡ 79) or “Disc Name”
(➡ 77) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT9135
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
Page
86
DVD
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
FINISH
≥The software update is complete.
90
—
—
HARD ERR
NoERAS
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥This message may appear when the lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
15
14
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
PLEASE WAIT
≥Displayed when the unit is started and turn off. This is not malfunction.
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait
until the message disappears.
—
—
PROG FULL
REMOVE
START
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
36
—
90
≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
≥Update of the software is started.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
SW-DL
≥Software is downloading.
90
78
Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer recording starts.
UNFORMAT
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORT
UPD /
U59
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
8–10
11
≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
≥The software is being updated.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
90
≥The unit is hot.
—
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear
of the unit.
U61
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
—
—
U72
U73
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
U76
≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright
protection.
—
U77
U88
≥Due to the current disc not having authorised copyright information, video output is not performed.
—
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
100
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now
—
—
press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
H or F
≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
100–
107
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
X HOLD
≥The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.
89
RQT9135
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
Updating to the latest software may solve the problem. (➡ 90)
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic terrestrial broadcasting
breaks.
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being
activated. (Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10
seconds.)
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
≥Operations are slow to respond in power save mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
Power
Page
No power.
≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.
16, 93
The unit does not turn on
pressing [Í DVD].
The unit switches to standby
mode.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.
—
The power is turned off
automatically.
≥If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI cable, this unit will
be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.
72
Displays
The display is dim.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
84
86
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
≥Set the clock.
The time recorded on the disc
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
—
—
and the available time shown do ≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
not add up.
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
The displayed time of this unit is ≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
—
—
different from the actual
recording time.
increase in disc space.
≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
—
—
Compared to the actual recorded ≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
Available disc space display is
showing different from what was
used
≥Available disc space display may be different from actual. Varying may be large especially
—
—
when recorded in DR mode.
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about
10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
2
RQT9135
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV screen and video
Page
—
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It
can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
The digital channel information or ≥Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that the “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu will be
84
control panel does not appear.
displayed.
≥The digital channel information will not appear during playback or recording.
≥The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI
Control 3” function.
—
73
Picture does not appear during
timer recording.
≥Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
—
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Check the following setting in the Setup menu.
84
– “TV Aspect”, “Aspect for 4:3 Video”
≥If it is connected with COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal, set the “Progressive” in Picture
menu to “Off”. If it has no effect or you cannot set to “Off”, set the “Component Resolution” in
Setup menu to “576i/480i” and “HDMI Video Mode” to “Off”.
74, 85
Screen size is wrong.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
The screen changes
automatically.
The recorded title is stretched
vertically.
≥If there is no operation for 10 minutes or more, the displayed screen switches to the other
84
84
states automatically. (only when the “Screen Saver” in Setup menu is set to “On”.)
≥It may have been recorded with 4:3 aspect ratio. You will be able to view in 16:9 aspect ration
by setting the “TV Aspect” in Setup menu to “16:9”.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
≥If the 16:9 aspect ratio image is output to a 4:3 TV connected with the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT terminal or the HDMI AV OUT terminal, it will be stretched vertically. Adjust by the aspect
ratio setting on the TV. If you cannot make the adjustment, set the “Component Resolution” in
the Setup menu to “576p/480p” and “HDMI Video Format” to “576p/480p”.
85
There is a lot of after-image when ≥Set “HD optimizer” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
74
74
playing video.
When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
—
The images from this unit do not ≥Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal,
16, 17,
91, 92,
93
appear on the television.
S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.
—
Picture is distorted.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds
to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
—
≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While
stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
84
≥When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV
system.
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
—
—
The picture is distorted during
play, or video will not play
correctly.
≥You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavourable weather
conditions.
≥The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in
the following situations:
—
—
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
RQT9135
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Sound
Page
No sound.
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
16, 17,
83, 91,
92, 93
39
Low volume.
amplifier if you have connected one.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn the “Sound Effects” in the Sound menu to “Off” in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast titles.
75
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT
terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “HDMI Audio Output” to
“On” in the Setup menu.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected
with an HDMI cable.
—
—
85
—
Cannot switch audio.
≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”).
≥The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable, a coaxial cable or an HDMI cable.
You cannot switch the audio if “Digital Audio Output” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Digital Audio
Output” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables.
83
82
83, 91,
92
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
—
Operation
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
89
86
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
control.
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time
for more than 5 seconds.
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
12
12
—
—
≥Software is updating when “UPD /” is displaying on the unit’s display. Wait until the update
is completed.
90
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.
86
89
89
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
—
—
—
—
1Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about
10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
2Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the
dealer.
Cannot eject disc.
≥The unit is recording.
—
89
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.
Cannot tune channels.
≥Check the connections.
≥You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with a HDMI cable to
download channel presets.
16, 93
—
Cannot download channel
presets from the television.
Startup is slow.
≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
86
—
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
RQT9135
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording, timer recording and copying
Page
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
≥You can not record to the disc by pressing the [¥ REC].
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
—
8, 9
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The disc is protected with DVD Management.
≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete
unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy.
78
77
110
26, 43,
78, 82
26, 43,
82
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 499.
≥You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
—
—
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto or edit them if you either insert and remove the disc
or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of 30 times.
≥The discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic Recorders.
≥Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be able to be recorded to.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings.
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
≥Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
—
—
—
—
Cannot record from external
equipment.
≥Check that the connection is correct.
53, 54,
93
—
≥Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.
Cannot record 2 programmes
simultaneously.
≥It cannot in following conditions.
–Record 2 digital broadcasting programmes in other than DR mode
–Record 2 programmes from external input
–Record 2 programmes to disc
–When performing high speed copying (1 programme can be recorded to HDD)
—
–Recording from DV input, while “Recording via AV3 input”
Timer recording does not work
properly.
≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap (
is
36
35
displayed). Correct the programme.
≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording is
grey.)
≥Set the clock.
86
34
≥The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be correct. It is recommended
to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes.
Cannot timer record to the disc.
≥It cannot timer record in following conditions.
–Unformatted disc
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
—
–Timer record to DVD-RAM in DR mode
–Disc with protect setting
–Destination disc for timer recording is registered already
–Timer recording for “One time only recording” programme is set to DVD-RAM not
compatible to CPRM
The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.
≥The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
34
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.
≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.
—
78, 82
Cannot copy to a disc using the
high speed mode.
≥High speed copying cannot be performed depending on the disc or title that is being copied.
48
—
Refer to “When is the time high speed copy is not possible?” for details.
When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.
≥Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 hours) mode recording.
—
—
An unusually loud sound is
≥When recording or high speed copying to a disc, the sound of the disc rotating may be louder
—
—
coming from the rotating disc.
than normal, however, this is not a problem.
The quality has dropped when
the title in HDD is copied to the
disc.
≥Titles in HD quality (titles recorded in DR mode or titles in AVCHD) will be copied as SD
quality when copied to [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW].
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.
54
—
—
—
55
RQT9135
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Play
Page
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
15
15
10
—
—
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 hours)” mode.
≥You cannot playback while executing the “Recording via AV3 input” or when recording from
the DV input.
≥Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are displayed, follow the
on-screen instructions.
82
—
—
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
—
—
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
—
39
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
DVD-Video is not played.
≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
≥Ensure the disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.
82
Cover
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.
—
22
No subtitles.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.
—
74
Angle cannot be changed.
≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.
—
—
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.
≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE
SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main
unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
Image for the Quick View is not
smooth.
≥Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR mode titles or [AVCHD].
—
—
The resume play function does
not work.
≥Memorized positions are cancelled when
–open the disc tray.
–[SD] [CD] [USB] turn off the power.
([HDD] Will not be cancelled)
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does ≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title
84
—
not work.
recorded on the disc.
Slow-motion playback does not
go reverse.
≥Slow-motion playback in reverse does not work for title that has copied the AVCHD and
[AVCHD].
Reverse frame-by-frame does not ≥[AVCHD] Reverse frame-by-frame cannot be done.
—
—
work properly.
≥Frame-by-frame backward for titles that have copied the AVCHD will be reversed in 10 frame
units.
Cannot see the beginning of the ≥(If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)
—
title played.
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the
beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the
beginning of the title.
Edit
Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.
≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
26
—
Cannot edit.
≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
26
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
15
10
Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before
a start point.
—
—
Cannot create a playlist.
≥Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.
—
RQT9135
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures
Page
—
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
Cannot edit or format a card.
≥Release the card’s protection setting.
11
—
The contents of the card cannot
be read.
≥Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn
off and turn on the unit again.
≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and
FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this
unit.
11
111
—
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and SDHC Memory Cards
with capacities from 4 GB to 32 GB.
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
—
78
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or
card.
Music
Tracks could not be copied to
the HDD.
≥If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not be copied.
≥Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.)
cannot be guaranteed.
—
—
≥Bonus tracks may not be copied.
—
R
Title of the newly released CD
cannot be acquired.
94
≥Title cannot be acquired if the title is not registered in the built-in Gracenote database.
Connection to the network is necessary to acquire title for the newly released CD.
ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not
completely displayed.
≥Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit.
—
USB
The contents of the USB memory ≥Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again. If this does not solve the
—
cannot be read.
problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
≥Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly.
≥The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the unit. (The
contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)
≥The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible
with this unit.
15
11
111
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
—
—
≥USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may not be
recognized by this unit.
≥Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
≥If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may not be
recognized by this unit.
11
—
USB memory cannot be
operated.
≥Turn the power of this unit off once, and turn it back on. If it cannot be operated after that, set
“VIERA Link” to “Off”.
85
RQT9135
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
TV Guide
Page
The TV Guide System does not
receive any data.
≥Check whether the clock is properly set.
≥If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the TV Guide system may not be
able to receive any data.
86
—
“No Data” is displayed for some ≥Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.
—
34
or all stations.
≥Programme the Timer recording manually.
The TV Guide information is not
displayed properly.
≥There was a programme change.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV Guide system provider or
station provider.
—
The TV Guide data transfer was
interrupted.
≥The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.
≥The programme information may be incomplete.
—
—
The TV Guide data is not
updated.
≥Make sure that the time is set correctly.
86
Digital broadcast
Digital broadcasts cannot be
received.
≥Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
≥The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station, or the direction of the aerial
may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV
aerial installer.
—
—
After Auto-Setup only some or
no DVB channels are found.
≥Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
—
—
≥Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/installed by a licensed installer that
should comply with Australian Standard AS1417.1.
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/UHF aerial should be
adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception
performance.
≥If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master Antenna TV (MATV) system is
designed for DVB-T reception. Please consult your body corporate.
—
Picture regularly breaks up on
some channels. “No signal”
message is displayed.
≥Check “DVB Signal Display”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are displayed in red or
constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
≥Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/installed by a licensed installer that
should comply with Australian Standard AS1417.1.
81
—
≥Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such as light switches,
fridges etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad
shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse
noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
≥Check aerial connection.
—
—
81
≥Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup menu.
Picture very infrequently breaks ≥Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lighting storms or heavy rain
—
up on some or all channels.
with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
≥Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance, or a passing
vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.
—
RQT9135
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VIERA Link
Page
—
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
≥Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when
the power for the main unit is set to On.
≥Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
85
—
—
≥Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
≥Some functions may not work if depending on the version of “HDAVI Control” of the connected
equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” functions.
≥If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a
power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may
not work.
—
In this case, perform the following operations.
1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV (VIERA)
on again.
2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on
again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is
displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.
The operation on this unit (music ≥The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote
—
playback etc.) is interrupted.
control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset
≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings
level and ratings password return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are
also cancelled.
≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the tuning
settings, clock settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote
control code, network settings return to the factory presets.
≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Region Selection screen
appears. All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock settings
return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
86
86
—
To reset the ratings level
settings
≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and
—
—
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety devices
being activated
≥Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)
Network
I can’t connect to the network.
≥Has the LAN cable come unplugged? Check that the LAN cable is properly connected.
≥Have you plugged in a modular cable for use with a telephone into the LAN terminal on this
unit? Connect with a straight LAN cable.
94
94
≥Is the power for the modem or broadband router turned on? Turn the power on for each
device.
≥Is there a mistake in the network settings? Follow any instructions you may have received
from your ISP (Internet Service Provider) and make changes to the settings.
≥Are the broadband router settings correct? Read the operating instructions for the broadband
router.
—
—
—
—
≥Is the broadband router and/or modem correctly connected? Check the operating
instructions for each device and connect accordingly.
While using my PC, I cannot
connect to the network.
≥Does your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or service contract prevent multiple terminals
connecting at the same time? Check the content of your contract.
—
Other
After performing an update, you ≥Depending on the content of the update, some settings may have returned to the preset
—
can no longer receive
broadcasts.
values. Fix the settings again.
RQT9135
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Recording system
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R: DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format
Audio
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP, LP, EP mode),
Linear PCM (XP mode),
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format
Dolby Digital 2ch, Max 5.1ch (DVB-T) (DR mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Audio in:
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:
Output level:
Output impedance:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Coaxial terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL:
DVD-RW:
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMI™ (V.1.3 with Deep Colour)
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.
+R:
Video
Video system:
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R DL:
+RW:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Playable discs
Recording system:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format, AVCHD format
DVD-R: DVD-Video format, AVCHD format§1
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format, AVCHD format§1
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format,
AVCHD format§1
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA)
1
CD-R/CD-RW: CD-DA§1, MP3§1, JPEG§
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output
(NTSC 480i/480p/720p/1080i, PAL 576i/576p/720p/1080i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Internal HDD capacity
Optical pick-up
250 GB
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD
DVD
780 nm wave length
662 nm wave length
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
RQT9135
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Television system
Tuner system
MP3
Playable
media
[HDD] [CD] [USB]
Channel coverage
VHF: 6 to 12
UHF: 27 to 69
DVB-T
Australia
File
format
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
RF converter output:
Not provided
Number
[CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99
SD Card
Slot:
Compatible media:
Format:
of folders folders (including the root folder)
[USB] Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300
folders (including the root folder)
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Memory Card§2, SDHC Memory Card
FAT12, FAT16§3 (In case of SD Memory Card)
FAT32§3 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
Number
of files
(tracks)
[CD] Maximum number of files recognizable: 999 files
[USB] Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 3000
files
Still picture (JPEG)
Image file format:
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),
Number of pixels:
Between 34 a 34 and 5120 a 3840
sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Sampling 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz
frequency
Thawing time:
Video (SD Video)§4
Codec:
Approx. 2 sec. (8.1 M pixels, JPEG)
ID3 tags
compatible ([HDD] [USB])
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
File Format:
Still pictures (JPEG§2
)
Video (HD Video)
Codec:
File Format:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
AVCHD format conforming
Playable
media
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB]
[SD]
DV input
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin: 1 pc
File
File format: JPEG
format
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
USB port
Type A: 1 pc
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
USB standard:
Format:
Number
of pixels
Between 34k34 and 5120k3840
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Video (SD Video)§4
Codec:
Number
of
[CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99
folders (including the root folder)
[USB] Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300
folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders (include upper level folder)
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
File Format:
folders§3
Video (HD Video)
Codec:
File Format:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
AVCHD format conforming
LAN (Ethernet) Port
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Number
of files§3
[CD] Maximum number of files recognizable: 999 files
[USB] Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 3000
files
[RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000
files
[HDD] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000 files
Others
Region code:
#4
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 45 W
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkHkD):
MOTION
JPEG
not supported
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG and other
types of files is 4000.
430 mmk59 mmk315 mm (excluding the projecting parts)
430 mmk59 mmk334 mm (including the projecting parts)
Approx. 4.5 kg
Mass:
§2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
§3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 3 W (Power Save mode)
Approx. 15 W (Quick Start mode)
[CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
[Note]
formats) and Joliet
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders and some files (tracks) may not display or be
playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders may not play in the order you numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
§1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
§2 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
§3 Long file name is unsupported.
§4 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card or
Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or
DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.
≥Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)
JPEG
≥Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
§4 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
RQT9135
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
AVCHD
Formatting
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high definition video cameras
that can be used to record and play high-resolution HD images.
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
u
r
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on discs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Frame
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
DNS Server
A server which acts like a telephone directory and translates Internet
domain names into IP addresses.
Dolby Digital
Gateway
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio.
IP address of the electronic device providing Internet access.
Usually called a router IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.1)
HDD (Hard disk drive)
Down-mixing
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into fewer channels.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of
data.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Hub
Dynamic range
Used for connecting more than one device to the network.
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
IP address
A set of numbers which distinguish each PC on the network when,
for example, connected to the Internet. When using a PC in a LAN to
access a PC or device that is not included in the LAN, the IP address
is called the local IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.10)
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
Film and video
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or
animation.
LAN (Local Area Network)
A group of linked devices in a company, school or home.
Indicates the boundaries of a particular network.
Video:
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is an encoding method used for recording of
the high definition videos.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place
where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2, etc. are stored.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan:
The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
RQT9135
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Progressive/Interlace
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the image in 2
phases by splitting the display into odd and even scans.
Progressive will display whole image in 1 scan. Therefore, it will give
high definition image without flickering compared with interlace.
Protection
Structure of MP3 folders
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
[CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in
Root
the order you want to play
001 Folder
Router
them.
Distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device, such as the
PC, and relays the flow of data within the network.
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
RGB
002 Folder
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 Folder
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Order of play
Structures of still picture folders
[CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are
displayed in the order
they were updated or
taken.
Root
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels
you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time
(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,
etc.
002 Folder
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
003 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
Subnet mask
Enables efficient network use. A set of numbers which identify which
part of the IP address allocated to every device connected to the
router is the network portion.
004 Folder
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Order of play
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
[RAM]
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
1080i
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
§1 Still pictures on the root
folder can also be
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
Root
ꢁ1
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
displayed.
JPEG
§2 Folders can be created
on other equipment.
However, these folders
cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file
name has been input
using other equipment,
the name may not be
displayed properly or you
may not be able to play or
edit the data.
DCIMꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
ꢁ2
DCIM
720p
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
[SD]
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
Card
DCIM
XXXXX
(Picture folder)
XXXX.JPG
Any folder with JPEG files
e.g.,
001
P0000001.JPG
P0000001.JPG
(MPEG2 folder)
SD_VIDEO
PRG
MOV.MOD
MOV.MOI
PRG.PGI
MGR_INFO
(MPEG2 information folder)
PRIVATE
(AVCHD folder)
AVCHD
RQT9135
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety precautions
Foreign matter
Placement
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS 2.0iDigital Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
≥SDHC Logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in
compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and
non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for
any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. and Sony Corporation.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
RQT9135
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gracenote® Corporate Description
-If you see this symbol-
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000–2008 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000–
2008 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some
services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
R
Gracenote End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE
TERMS BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions
of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-
commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate
if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree
to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from
the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any
time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
RQT9135
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Adjust the audio quality (Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adjust the picture quality (Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Album (Music)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Album (Still picture)
Display
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DR (Direct Recording mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 30
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DVB Signal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Audio
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
AVCHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
AV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment
–Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 110
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 110
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Gracenote® database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Channel
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Cleaning
HDD
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Connecting with a Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connecting with a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Settings (HDMI Connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
HD Video
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Connection
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 93
Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 92
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 92–93
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 93
Copy
HD Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 46–52
Copy Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 82
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 82
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 82
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 110
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Menu
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
MPEG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Music
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Play (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Play (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Play (Music on HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
All titles (Discs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
All titles (HDD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Digital broadcast
Name
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 43
Network
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DVB Signal Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
New service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Direct Navigator
Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Discs
Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Disc name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
New service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
One Touch Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playing back
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
HD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Playlist
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 111
RQT9135
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properties
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control)
Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Protection
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2 programmes simultaneous
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Ratings level
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Recording via AV3 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 34–37
Recording via AV3 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
SD card
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copy (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Play (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SD Video
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Subtitle
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc (Disc menu) . . . . . . . . 74
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Timer recording
Check, change or delete a programme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Manual Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using the TV Guide System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Title
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 46–52
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 37
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
USB
Copy (HD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
RQT9135
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
p
RQT9135-L
F0408EY0 ( 4100 A )
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|